Preface

Introduction 1

Safety notes 2
THYRIPOL
Description 3
Static excitation systems 4
Preparations for use
with/without starting frequency
converter
Mounting 5
Operating Instructions

Electrical connection 6

Commissioning 7

Operation 8

Maintenance 9

Spare parts 10

Disposal 11

Service & Support A

Technical specifications and
drawings B

Appendix C C

Additional documents D

03/2017
A5E33461870A
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG Document order number: 6RX1800-0KD76 Copyright © Siemens AG 2016.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 06/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

THYRIPOL® is a static excitation system for synchronous generators and synchronous

compensators. It is well-suited for use in gas-fired, steam and hydroelectric power plants, as
well as for converters or synchronous compensators.
A distinction is made here between compact units and individual excitation systems.
The compact unit consists of a starting frequency converter (SFC) and an excitation system.
Its application areas are turbo sets with gas turbines.
The THYRIPOL products can be adapted very flexibly to the conditions pertaining at the
associated plants. This means they can be deployed advantageously for new plants and the
conversion of existing plants.
The systems are designed particularly for a space-saving mounting and deployment in
preassembled containers. They are also installed in electrical switchrooms and power
houses with adapted cabinet degree of protection.
The use of robust and field-tested technology characterizes the THYRIPOL product range
with its high availability, high reliability and low maintenance costs.

User documentation

Note
Observe safety and warning notices
Read all the safety and warning notices carefully and all warning labels attached to the
devices and cabinets before installation and commissioning of the system. The warning
labels must always be legible. Missing or damaged labels must be replaced.

Structure of this documentation

The customer documentation comprises general and order-specific documentation.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 5
General documentation
The general documentation describes the topics that are applicable to all versions of the
THYRIPOL static excitation system, and include:

Document Content, discussed topics

THYRIPOL operating instructions Device description, mechanical installation, electrical installa-
tion, commissioning instructions, function description,
maintenance notes, technical specifications.
THYRIPOL closed-loop control list Parameter list, function diagrams, faults and alarms.
manual Specific part of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module firm-
ware.
THYRIPOL open-loop control list Parameter list, function diagrams, faults and alarms.
manual Specific part of the SIMATIC firmware.
For starting frequency converter: Description, installation, commissioning, operation, mainte-
nance, technical specifications, parameter list, function dia-
• Operating instructions
grams, faults and alarms.
• Commissioning manual
• List manual

Project-specific documentation
The project-specific documentation describes just one customized system and contains the
following:

Document Content, discussed topics

Electrical circuit manual The circuit manual shows the electrical components installed
in the ordered system including the equipment codes and
location codes, their interconnections, and the customer inter-
faces.
Layout diagram The layout diagram shows the components installed in the
ordered system with the equipment codes and location
codes.
Dimension drawing The dimension drawing documents the dimensions of the
ordered system.
Bill of materials The bill of materials lists all installed equipment with the
equipment code, the location code and the order designation.
Parameter list Those values set in the software for the system are entered in
the parameter list.
Quality plan The quality plan describes the standard process for the quali-
ty-assurance inspections at CEE RC-AT SIMEA.
Test certificates The test certificates list the specifications and standards
against which the ordered system was unit tested.
Supplementary operating instructions The instructions for the important components of the ordered
system are supplied with the documentation.
Plant component connection dia- The diagrams are provided by the purchaser and are custom-
grams ized for the specific plant.
If they are not provided by the purchaser, they are optionally
created order-specific and supplied with the documentation
("Component connection diagrams" option).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 6
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 5
1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 13
2 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................................... 15
2.1 Safety concept ........................................................................................................................17
2.2 Notes on operator protection ..................................................................................................18
2.2.1 Information about electromagnetic fields ................................................................................21
2.3 Notes on plant safety ..............................................................................................................22
2.4 ESD guidelines .......................................................................................................................25
2.5 Industrial security ....................................................................................................................27
3 Description ............................................................................................................................................ 29
3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................29
3.1.1 General ...................................................................................................................................29
3.1.2 Components ............................................................................................................................29
3.1.2.1 Connection cabinet .................................................................................................................29
3.1.2.2 Additional cabinet modules .....................................................................................................30
3.1.2.3 Power converter system .........................................................................................................30
3.1.2.4 De-excitation system...............................................................................................................31
3.1.2.5 Starting converter ....................................................................................................................31
3.1.2.6 Control cabinet ........................................................................................................................32
3.1.2.7 Display and operator panel .....................................................................................................32
3.1.3 Architecture of the THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact units ...................................33
3.1.4 Operating modes ....................................................................................................................36
3.1.5 Display and operator panel, details ........................................................................................37
3.2 Starting converter ....................................................................................................................37
3.3 Scope of delivery ....................................................................................................................40
3.4 Type plates .............................................................................................................................41
3.4.1 Excitation system ....................................................................................................................41
3.4.2 Compact system .....................................................................................................................42
3.5 Standards ................................................................................................................................46
3.6 Options ....................................................................................................................................47
4 Preparations for use .............................................................................................................................. 69
4.1 Note.........................................................................................................................................69
4.1.1 Installation instructions............................................................................................................69
4.1.2 Note for compact systems ......................................................................................................70
4.2 General ...................................................................................................................................71
4.2.1 Container installation / installation in the power house ...........................................................71
4.2.2 Interim storage ........................................................................................................................71

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 7
Table of contents

4.3 Transportation ........................................................................................................................ 72

4.3.1 Tilt and shock indicators ........................................................................................................ 72
4.3.2 Base frame ............................................................................................................................. 73
4.3.3 Transportation altitude ........................................................................................................... 74
4.3.4 Lifting and transportation ....................................................................................................... 74
4.4 Completeness and transport damage .................................................................................... 77
4.5 Transport to the installation location ...................................................................................... 78
4.6 Installing the transport units ................................................................................................... 78
5 Mounting ............................................................................................................................................... 79
5.1 Torques for screw connections .............................................................................................. 80
5.2 Removing the pallet ............................................................................................................... 80
5.3 Moving the cabinet group on a plane ..................................................................................... 81
5.4 Connection of the cabinet group ............................................................................................ 81
5.5 Fastening the cabinet group .................................................................................................. 81
5.6 Fan installation (starting converter)........................................................................................ 83
6 Electrical connection ............................................................................................................................. 85
6.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 85
6.1.1 Screw connections ................................................................................................................. 85
6.1.2 Terminal data ......................................................................................................................... 86
6.1.3 Base plate penetrations ......................................................................................................... 86
6.1.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ..................................................................................... 87
6.1.5 Routing of the bus cable ........................................................................................................ 91
6.2 Cabling ................................................................................................................................... 91
6.2.1 Wiring the transport units ....................................................................................................... 92
6.2.1.1 Example: Wiring a THYRIPOL compact system .................................................................... 93
6.2.2 Cable strain-relief bus ............................................................................................................ 96
6.3 Grounding .............................................................................................................................. 97
7 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 99
7.1 Commissioning the hardware ................................................................................................ 99
7.1.1 Testing the system wiring .................................................................................................... 101
7.1.2 High-voltage test .................................................................................................................. 101
7.1.3 Test of the DC de-excitation switch ..................................................................................... 102
7.1.4 Connecting and checking the power supplies ..................................................................... 102
7.1.5 Switch on and check the open- and closed-loop components ............................................ 104
7.2 Commissioning the software ................................................................................................ 105
7.2.1 Switch on .............................................................................................................................. 105
7.2.2 Check messages.................................................................................................................. 105
7.2.3 System configuration ........................................................................................................... 105
7.2.4 System parameterization ..................................................................................................... 105
7.2.5 Function diagram references ............................................................................................... 106
7.2.6 Software ............................................................................................................................... 107
7.3 Software installation ............................................................................................................. 107
7.3.1 Display and operator panel installation ................................................................................ 107

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

8 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Table of contents

7.3.1.1 Update of the display and operator panel software ..............................................................109

7.3.1.2 Installation of the software after replacement of the display and operator panel .................109
7.3.2 SIMATIC S7 installation ........................................................................................................110
7.3.2.1 Update the SIMATIC S7 software .........................................................................................111
7.3.3 CUD/BCU installation............................................................................................................111
7.3.3.1 Update the CUD/BCU software ............................................................................................111
8 Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 113
8.1 Operation, fundamentals ......................................................................................................113
8.1.1 Components ..........................................................................................................................113
8.1.2 Storage media .......................................................................................................................114
8.2 Access levels ........................................................................................................................115
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel ..................................................................118
8.3.1 Structure of the user interface ..............................................................................................118
8.3.1.1 Title bar .................................................................................................................................119
8.3.1.2 Status field ............................................................................................................................119
8.3.1.3 Operator panel ......................................................................................................................120
8.3.1.4 Menu .....................................................................................................................................122
8.3.1.5 Screen ...................................................................................................................................122
8.3.2 Screens .................................................................................................................................123
8.3.2.1 Start.......................................................................................................................................123
8.3.2.2 Values ...................................................................................................................................124
8.3.2.3 Analog values .......................................................................................................................126
8.3.2.4 Reactive power control / power factor control ......................................................................128
8.3.2.5 P-Q power diagram ...............................................................................................................131
8.3.2.6 Trends ...................................................................................................................................132
8.3.2.7 Messages ..............................................................................................................................135
8.3.2.8 Starting converter ..................................................................................................................136
8.3.2.9 Service ..................................................................................................................................137
8.3.2.10 Languages ............................................................................................................................137
8.3.3 Screens under the Service menu .........................................................................................138
8.3.3.1 Admin ....................................................................................................................................138
8.3.3.2 Software versions .................................................................................................................140
8.3.3.3 Power Unit ............................................................................................................................140
8.3.3.4 Operating hours counter .......................................................................................................141
8.3.3.5 Events ...................................................................................................................................143
8.3.3.6 System trace .........................................................................................................................144
8.3.3.7 Logbook ................................................................................................................................146
8.3.3.8 Parameters ...........................................................................................................................146
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system ...................................................................................153
8.4.1 Automatic mode – voltage regulator mode ...........................................................................153
8.4.1.1 Controller structure ...............................................................................................................153
8.4.1.2 Actual value acquisition and preparation of the generator variables ....................................154
8.4.1.3 Setpoint control .....................................................................................................................155
8.4.1.4 Underexcitation limitation ......................................................................................................156
8.4.1.5 Overexcitation limitation ........................................................................................................156
8.4.1.6 Stator current limitation .........................................................................................................157
8.4.1.7 Shock excitation limitation ....................................................................................................157
8.4.1.8 V/f limitation ..........................................................................................................................158
8.4.1.9 Reactive current droop and reactive current compensation .................................................158
8.4.1.10 Stage of the unit transformer tap changer ............................................................................158

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 9
Table of contents

8.4.2 Manual mode – field current controller operation (ECR)...................................................... 159

8.4.2.1 Controller structure .............................................................................................................. 159
8.4.3 Oscillation damping device (optionally available) ................................................................ 159
8.4.4 Switching the automatic/manual controller modes .............................................................. 159
8.4.5 Reactive power control and power factor control - option S31 ............................................ 160
8.4.6 Reactive power compensatory control (optionally available) ............................................... 161
8.4.7 Operation of the starting converter ...................................................................................... 163
8.4.8 Operating modes of the compact system ............................................................................ 164
8.4.8.1 Normal start.......................................................................................................................... 164
8.4.8.2 Hold firing speed (optionally available) ................................................................................ 164
8.4.8.3 Fast gas start ....................................................................................................................... 164
8.4.8.4 Starting with two starting profiles (optionally available) ....................................................... 164
8.4.8.5 Washing operation ............................................................................................................... 164
8.4.8.6 Ventilation of the boiler (optionally available) ...................................................................... 165
8.4.8.7 Fast cooling of the gas turbine (optionally available) ........................................................... 165
8.4.8.8 Phase shifter start (optionally available) .............................................................................. 165
8.4.8.9 Braking operation (optionally available) ............................................................................... 165
8.4.8.10 Emergency turning (optionally available) ............................................................................. 165
8.4.8.11 Self-contained starting (optionally available) ....................................................................... 166
8.4.8.12 Boiler ventilating in the self-contained starting situation (optionally available) .................... 166
8.4.9 Water-power operating modes............................................................................................. 166
8.4.9.1 Electrical braking on short-circuit (optionally available) ....................................................... 166
8.4.9.2 Converter braking for pumped-storage power plants (optionally available) ........................ 166
8.4.9.3 Converter start for pumped-storage power plants (optionally available) ............................. 167
8.4.9.4 Ramp-up conductor (optionally available) ........................................................................... 167
8.4.9.5 Back-to-back start (optionally available) .............................................................................. 167
8.4.10 Unlocked mode .................................................................................................................... 168
8.4.11 Test excitation (optionally available) .................................................................................... 168
8.5 Execution variants of the open-loop/closed-loop channel ................................................... 169
8.6 Switching on the static excitation system ............................................................................ 172
8.7 Switching off the static excitation system ............................................................................ 172
8.8 Initial excitation (optionally available) .................................................................................. 173
8.9 Test switch (optionally available) ......................................................................................... 175
8.10 Transverse start (optionally available) ................................................................................. 176
8.11 Current symmetry control ..................................................................................................... 179
8.12 Free function blocks for the voltage controller ..................................................................... 180
8.13 Communication .................................................................................................................... 181
8.13.1 Communication to the instrumentation and control ............................................................. 181
8.13.1.1 Communication via PROFIBUS DP ..................................................................................... 181
8.13.1.2 Communication via Modbus TCP (optionally available) ...................................................... 181
8.13.1.3 Communication via the hardware connection (optionally available) .................................... 182
8.14 Alarm, error and system messages ..................................................................................... 186
8.14.1 Basic principles .................................................................................................................... 186
8.14.2 List Manuals ......................................................................................................................... 186
9 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................187
9.1 Term ..................................................................................................................................... 187

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

10 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Table of contents

9.2 Important safety instructions .................................................................................................188

9.3 Grounding the system ...........................................................................................................191
9.4 Opening the cabinet doors ....................................................................................................192
9.5 Inspection and maintenance .................................................................................................193
9.5.1 Inspection of the cooling air system......................................................................................195
9.5.2 Checking the service life of the fans .....................................................................................196
9.5.3 Check the screwed fastenings ..............................................................................................196
9.5.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................196
9.6 Corrective maintenance ........................................................................................................200
9.6.1 Storage and replacement of the fans ....................................................................................201
9.6.1.1 Fans in the power section cabinet module ...........................................................................201
9.6.1.2 Roof fan (option) ...................................................................................................................204
9.6.2 Replacement of the power converter ....................................................................................207
9.6.3 Repair capability during operation of the power section .......................................................218
9.6.3.1 Disconnection of a power converter .....................................................................................220
9.6.3.2 Protect against reconnection ................................................................................................223
9.6.3.3 Replacement of the power converter ....................................................................................224
9.6.3.4 Completion of the work and resumption of the correct operation .........................................225
9.7 Replacing fuses ....................................................................................................................228
9.8 Installation of the software after component replacement ....................................................232
9.8.1 Installation of the software after replacement of the SIMATIC S7-300 CPU ........................232
9.8.2 Installation of the software after replacement of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module .......233
9.9 Replacement of the AC overvoltage protection (option L21) ................................................235
10 Spare parts ......................................................................................................................................... 237
11 Disposal .............................................................................................................................................. 239
A Service & Support ............................................................................................................................... 241
B Technical specifications and drawings ................................................................................................. 243
B.1 Technical data .......................................................................................................................243
B.1.1 General data .........................................................................................................................243
B.1.2 Starting converter ..................................................................................................................252
B.1.2.1 Load cycle .............................................................................................................................252
B.1.2.2 Starting converter technical specifications............................................................................253
B.1.2.3 Derating (for the starting converter) ......................................................................................256
B.1.3 Static excitation system ........................................................................................................257
B.1.3.1 Load cycle .............................................................................................................................257
B.1.3.2 Technical specifications of the static excitation system........................................................258
B.1.3.3 Configuring of optional load cycles .......................................................................................268
B.1.3.4 Derating (for the excitation system) ......................................................................................270
B.2 Dimension drawings..............................................................................................................271
B.2.1 Static excitation systems.......................................................................................................272
B.2.2 Compact systems (examples) ..............................................................................................280
B.3 Block diagrams .....................................................................................................................283
C Additional documents .......................................................................................................................... 290
C.1 List of abbreviations ..............................................................................................................290

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 11
Table of contents

C.2 Deployed components ......................................................................................................... 293

C.3 Article number key ............................................................................................................... 296
C.4 Signals for representation and recording ............................................................................. 297
C.5 Profinet configuration ........................................................................................................... 304
Index ...................................................................................................................................................307

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

12 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Introduction 1
The objective of this manual is to convey know-how necessary to enable instructed persons
to operate the system professionally and safely.
Knowledge of the manuals and descriptions of the associated components is required for all
work on the various components. In case of doubt, request support from the Siemens
Customer Support.
Only appropriately trained and instructed personnel is permitted to operate the system.
This manual is intended to inform and instruct defined target groups, safeguard the
manufacturer against liability, observe the product, provide traceability and reproducibility, as
well as the long-term or legally required archiving of the relevant information content.
The individual sections of the manual provide information about the product itself, the
handling of the product, and the actions of users. They consider all phases of the product
life, from the development through to the disposal and recycling, in some cases including the
manufacturing of the preliminary products.
This document includes safety information and the important technical details of the static
excitation systems with and without a starting frequency converter.
The document also conveys the know-how that enables qualified staff to operate the system
in a professional manner and safely perform any work required. For other work on the
included devices, both in the event of a malfunction as well as for maintenance and service,
refer to the respective device manuals or notify Customer Support.
For detailed information about the individual product components, please refer to the specific
manuals of the deployed components.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 13
Introduction

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

14 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Safety notes 2
Note
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information on
all of the product types. This documentation cannot take into consideration every
conceivable type of installation, operation and maintenance.
If you require additional information or technical details for the documentation, contact your
local Siemens office.
We would also like to point out that the contents of this documentation are neither part of nor
modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or contractual relationship. All
obligations on the part of Siemens arise from the relevant contract of sale, which also
contains the complete and solely valid warranty conditions. These contractual warranty
provisions are neither extended nor curbed as a result of the statements made in this
documentation.

WARNING
Note the safety information
Operation, operating, maintenance or installation of the static excitation system without
observing the safety instructions can result in material damage, severe injury and death.
You must strictly comply with all notes regarding intended use. Different operating modes,
overloads, load cycles, and differing ambient conditions are permitted only after special
arrangement with the manufacturer.

WARNING
Qualified personnel
The system operates at a hazardous voltage level and contains dangerous rotating
machine parts (fans). Failure to comply with these operating instructions can lead to death,
serious injury and material damage.
Only qualified personnel are permitted to work on this system. Such personnel must be
thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and maintenance procedures referred to in
these Operating Instructions.
Perfect, safe and reliable operation of the system assumes that it has been professionally
transported, stored, mounted and installed as well as correct operation and servicing.

Note
Ensure that the local safety regulations and national safety guidelines are observed and
complied with.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 15
Safety notes

WARNING
Class I electrical equipment
The cabinet system of the static excitation system / compact unit (SES/CS) is implemented
as a class I item of electrical equipment (electrical plant component). Consequently, the
cabinet system provides a basic insulation as basic protection measure and a protective
bonding (protective grounding conductor) as fault protection measure.
Operation is permissible if the excitation system and the starting frequency converter are
connected to the appropriate protective grounding conductors in the plant. The protective
grounding conductors must also be connected with the grounding system of the plant
(power plant). The required cross-section of the protective grounding conductor must
conform with the national specifications and regulations (e.g. EN 61800-5-1, EN 60204-1,
EN 60204-11) for equipment with high discharge current.

NOTICE
PELV circuits
The control circuits of the open-loop and closed-loop control modules of the SES/CS
cabinet system are implemented as PELV (protective extra low voltage) circuits. The
voltage in these circuits does not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of class DVC A
(DVC in accordance with EN 61800-5-1). Consequently, these circuits provide protection in
the case of direct contact.
In turn, only PELV circuits that do not exceed the limit values of voltage class DVC A may
be connected to these circuits on the system.

NOTICE
Malfunctions caused by mobile radio devices
Use of mobile radio devices with a transmission power >1 W in the immediate vicinity of the
SES/CS cabinet system (<1.5 m) can cause malfunctions of the system.

WARNING
Unpermitted operation with ground fault
The type and location of the fault cannot be established just from a ground fault error
message. In the event of continued operation, serious aftereffects (all the way up to electric
arcs) are possible. Death, serious injury, or material damage can result.
If a ground fault occurs during operation, the system must be switched off immediately.
Then identify and eliminate the source of the ground fault.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

16 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Safety notes
2.1 Safety concept

2.1 Safety concept

The static excitation system with/without a starting frequency converter is subject to a
comprehensive safety concept, which, when properly implemented, ensures safe installation,
operation, service and maintenance.
The safety concept encompasses safety components and functions to protect the device and
operators.

Safety components for personnel protection

● Line-side transformer
Not included in the scope of delivery. The medium-voltage transformer limits the short-
circuit current in the event of a fault and must be designed so that the maximum
permissible short-circuit current is not exceeded.
● Line-side non-automatic circuit breaker of the static excitation system
Included in the scope of delivery
This is not included in the scope of delivery when option X28 "no line-side circuit breaker"
is chosen. A higher-level safety component is required in this case.
● External components for the safety concept
Line-side circuit breaker of the starting frequency converter (for compact units):
Provided by the customer, not included in the scope of delivery, control by the starting
frequency converter.

Safety-related functions for operator protection

● Enclosure
The sealed-off design of the enclosure for the excitation system ensures touch protection
in accordance with EN 60204-1. A warning is also issued on the operator panel if a door
of the power section cabinets is opened.
● Door limit switch
In accordance with EN 60204-11, opening the power section cabinets of the starting
frequency converter causes shutdown of the starting frequency converter and opens the
line-side circuit breaker. Enclosure parts (screwed-on panels) that can be removed
externally are monitored by door limit switches.

WARNING
Opening a door
The standard response to a door of the excitation system being opened is only to output
an alarm, not to shut down the excitation system. This alarm is displayed on the display
and operator panel of the excitation system. An appropriate alarm signal is made
available to the instrumentation and control.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 17
Safety notes
2.2 Notes on operator protection

Monitoring functions for internal system components

● Converter/rectifier protection by monitoring systems:
– Fuse monitoring or current flow monitoring
– Direct current-side overvoltage protection
– Line-side overvoltage protection (optionally available)
– Line monitoring for undervoltage, phase failure and frequency
– Thermal monitoring of the DC-link reactor (starting frequency converter)
– Supply voltage monitoring
– Circuit breaker monitoring
– Fan monitoring
● Semi-conductor failure
● Failure of the open-loop and closed-loop control components
● Internal hardware monitoring

2.2 Notes on operator protection

Note
Qualified personnel
All work associated with the transport, installation, commissioning, operation or maintenance
must be performed by qualified specialist personnel (electrically skilled person in accordance
with EN 50110-1 "Operation of electrical installations").
Dangerous locations in the system are marked with danger and warning notices.
These instructions are not a complete list of all of the measures required for safe operation
of the system. Should you require further information or technical details that have not been
handled in the documentation in enough detail for the purposes of the purchaser, please
contact your local Siemens office.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

18 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of these basic safety instructions, qualified personnel are persons
("electrically skilled person" in accordance with EN 50110-1 "Operation of electrical
installations") who are familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning and operation
of the product. They must be properly qualified for the tasks with which they are charged, for
example:
● Training and experience of the relevant regulations to evaluate the commissioned work
as well as recognize and prevent electrotechnical and other possible dangers.
● Training or instruction and/or authorization to switch on and off, ground, and mark
electrical circuits and equipment according to the standards of safety technology.
● Trained or instructed according to the latest safety standards regarding the maintenance
and use of the appropriate safety equipment.
● Training in first aid measures.

Read the following information about personal protection.

Safety-relevant instructions for working on the static excitation systems with/without a starting
frequency converter
The five safety rules:
Operation of electrical installations in accordance with EN 50110-1
This standard applies to the operation of and all work on, with or in the vicinity of electrical
installations.
Observe the five safety rules when performing any work
1. Disconnect completely
2. Secure against reconnection
3. Verify absence of operating voltage
4. Ground and short-circuit, see Section Grounding the system (Page 191)
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts

WARNING
Dangerous parts
When the static excitation systems are in operation, they have live and rotating parts.
Unauthorized removal of the required covers, improper use, or incorrect installation or
operation can cause death, serious injury or material damage.
Always take protective measures before touching any components.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 19
Safety notes
2.2 Notes on operator protection

WARNING
Dangerous voltages
High voltages can cause death or serious injury if the safety rules are not observed or if the
equipment is handled incorrectly.
Very high voltages are present when the static excitation system or the starting frequency
converter is in operation. These can remain present for a considerable time even after the
system has been shut down or for as long as the generator is rotating.
Make sure that work is only carried out by qualified personnel under strict observance of
the five safety rules, the warning notices in this documentation, and the safety-relevant
instructions.

WARNING
Capacitor discharge / dangerous voltages
After the line voltage has been disconnected, voltages are still present at the excitation
system or starting frequency converter. These voltages can cause death or severe injury.
After you have switched off the power supply, strictly observe the discharge time of the
suppressor capacitors of 5 minutes before you perform any maintenance work or repair
work and do not touch the device during this period.
Measure the voltage once the discharge time has elapsed (measured value ≤ 60 VDC).

WARNING
Hot surfaces
During operation, the temperature of certain components increases significantly; for
example, heat sinks, reactors, auxiliary transformers, thyristors, busbars.
These components can remain very hot for some time after operation. Serious injury
(scalding) may occur if you come into contact with these components.
Do not touch these hot components, even after the static excitation system or the starting
frequency converter has been shut down.

WARNING
High temperatures
If the static excitation system or starting frequency converter is not in operation, a
thermostat switches on the anti-condensation heating if a temperature limit is reached.
Once activated, the anti-condensation heating can generate a great deal of heat.
Serious injury (scalding) may occur if you come into contact with the anti-condensation
heating.
Make contact with the anti-condensation heating only after system shutdown and shutdown
of the auxiliary power supply and after the complete cooling of the cabinet heating.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

20 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Safety notes
2.2 Notes on operator protection

WARNING
Hazardous arcing
Arcing can result in damage to property, serious injury and even death.
Input currents above the maximum limit, incorrectly dimensioned circuit breakers or
transformers, and incorrectly connected or unconnected cables can result in danger due to
electric arcs in the event of a fault.
Make sure that the system is properly dimensioned and that the power cables are correctly
connected.
For static excitation systems with/without a starting frequency converter, design measures
to prevent the occurrence of arcing, or to prevent serious effects if arcing does occur, must
be considered.
The measures as specified in Chapter Notes on plant safety (Page 22) must be observed.

2.2.1 Information about electromagnetic fields

WARNING
Electromagnetic radiation during operation of the plant
Electromagnetic fields are generated during operation of electrical power engineering
installations.
Electromagnetic fields can interfere with electronic devices, which could cause them to
malfunction. For example, the operation of heart pacemakers can be impaired, potentially
leading to damage to a person's health or even death. It is therefore forbidden for persons
with heart pacemakers to enter these areas.
The plant operator is responsible for taking appropriate measures (labels and hazard
warnings) to adequately protect operating personnel and others against any possible risk.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 21
 ● Observe the relevant nationally applicable health and safety regulations or the applicable
national regulations in the country of installation. In Germany, "electromagnetic fields" are
subject to regulations BGV B11 and BGR B11 stipulated by the German statutory
industrial accident insurance institution.
● Display adequate hazard warning notices on the installation.

● Place barriers around hazardous areas.

● Take measures, e.g. using shields, to reduce electromagnetic fields at their source.
● Make sure that personnel are wearing the appropriate protective gear.

2.3 Notes on plant safety

Read the following information about plant protection:

WARNING
Safeguard the place of installation
The excitation system with and without a starting frequency converter is equipment for use
in power plants.
Improper use, incorrect operation, insufficient maintenance, and access by unauthorized
persons can result in accidents and subsequently death, serious injury, or property
damage.
Consequently, install excitation systems with and without a starting frequency converter in
switchgear rooms to which only qualified personnel have access.
Attach clear notices that indicate that only trained personnel are allowed to operate and
perform service on the static excitation system / compact unit.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 22
Preconditions
The operating company is responsible for the plant safety.
Ensure that:
● Only qualified personnel or personnel supervised by responsible instructed skilled
specialists are allowed to carry out basic planning and all the work involved in
transporting, assembling, installing, operating, maintaining and repairing the equipment.
● The operating instructions and all the product documentation are always available.
● The technical data and specifications regarding the permissible installation, connection,
environmental and operating conditions are always observed conscientiously.
● The set up and safety regulations specific to this machine are observed and personal
safety precautions taken.
● No work whatsoever may be performed by unqualified personnel either on this system or
in its vicinity.
The product documentation and the operating instructions in particular therefore only contain
the information that will allow the system to be used by qualified personnel in accordance
with their intended purpose.

Note
Support by Siemens
We recommend engaging the support and services of your local Siemens service center for
all planning, installation, commissioning and maintenance work.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 23
Line systems and fault protection measures
Excitation systems and compact units must be connected to the protective grounding system
of the plant according to regulations (see Chapter Introduction (Page 13)) and must only be
used in IT systems (power systems isolated from ground) with an insulation monitoring
system. This also applies to all supply sources of the power infeeds from the auxiliaries
service.
The permitted line systems for auxiliary power supplies are defined in Chapter Technical
data (Page 243).
Excitation systems and compact units do not have their own fault protection as defined in
IEC 364. The line-side circuit breaker of the excitation system does not have an overcurrent
tripping unit and does not open automatically in the event of a fault (short-circuit).
The plant operating company is responsible for the execution and tests of the line-side
required fault protection measures (plant protection with acquisition of short-circuits and
ground faults, and the appropriate activation of plant-side circuit breakers).
The maximum permitted switch-off times in the event of a fault (time between acquisition of
the fault until the switch-off of the system) are:

Excitation system: 150 ms

Starting frequency converter (for compact 100 ms
units):

WARNING
Observe switch-off times if a fault occurs
Failure to comply with shutdown times can result in accidents and therefore cause death
and severe material damage.
If the system is not immediately switched off after an insulation fault (insulation resistance
less than the permitted limit value) or ground fault (single-pole short-circuit of a phase to
ground) has been detected by an insulation monitoring system, personal safety is not
guaranteed at the excitation system or compact unit.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 24
 Safety notes
2.4 ESD guidelines

2.4 ESD guidelines

Electrostatic-sensitive devices (ESD)

NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These devices can be easily destroyed by improper handling, transport, storage and
shipping.
Pack electronic components in suitable conductive materials, such as anti-static plastic
bags or ESD foam.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.

● Never touch electronic modules unless absolutely necessary in the course of

maintenance and repair procedures.
● Only touch electronic components in ESD areas if these areas are equipped with
conductive flooring, you are grounded through an appropriate ESD wristband and you are
wearing ESD shoes or ESD shoe-grounding-strips.
● If the modules have to be touched, the body of the person concerned must be
electrostatically discharged immediately beforehand and be grounded.
● Do not bring electronic modules close to data terminals, monitors or televisions. Maintain
the minimum clearance to the screen (> 10 cm)
● Electronic modules should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating materials
such as plastic foil, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of synthetic
fibers.
● Always place electrostatic endangered assemblies on conductive ESD bases.
● Always store and transport electronic modules or components in conductive packaging
(e.g. metallized plastic or metal containers).
The necessary ESD protective measures for electrostatically sensitive devices are illustrated
once again in the following drawings:

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 25
Safety notes
2.4 ESD guidelines

(1) = sitting (2) = standing (3) = standing/sitting

ESD protective measures
a = conductive floor surface b = ESD table c = ESD shoes
d = ESD overall e = ESD wristband f = cabinet ground connection

Figure 2-1 ESD protective measures

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

26 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
2.5 Industrial security

Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. Siemens' products and
solutions undergo continuous development with this aspect in mind. Siemens recommends
that you inform yourself regularly about product updates.
To ensure the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take
suitable preventive measures (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component
into a state-of-the-art holistic industrial security concept. Any third-party products that may be
in use should also be considered. You will find more information about industrial security at:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
To stay informed about product updates, sign up for our product-specific newsletter. Further
information can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com

WARNING
Danger due to unsafe operating states caused by software manipulation
Software manipulations (e.g. viruses, trojans, malware, worms) can cause unsafe operating
states in your system that may cause death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
Information and newsletters can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art
industrial security concept for the plant or machine.
For more detailed information, go to:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
• Make sure that you include all installed products in the integrated industrial security
concept.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 27
Description 3
3.1 Overview

3.1.1 General
THYRIPOL exciter and compact systems are modular, closed cabinet systems with the
following main components:
● AC supply connection for the power infeed
● DC connection for the exciter winding of the generator
● Power converter system
See Chapter Power converter system (Page 30)
● De-excitation system
See Chapter De-excitation system (Page 31)
● Starting converter (for compact systems)
● Open-loop control modules
● Closed-loop control modules
● Display and operator panel

3.1.2 Components

3.1.2.1 Connection cabinet

The "interface cabinet" module covers the supply connection for the power infeed of the
excitation system (power converter input) and the DC connection for the field winding of the
generator (power converter output).
Components in the interface cabinet:
● Connection busbars for the feeding three-phase power system (L1, L2, L3, clockwise
phase sequence)
● Connection busbars for the protective grounding conductor of the complete cabinet
system
● Line-side circuit breaker
This is not included in the scope of delivery when option X28 "no line-side circuit breaker"
is chosen.
● Connection busbars for the plus and minus pole of the field winding of the generator

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 29
Description
3.1 Overview

● Open-loop control module for acquiring internal hardware signals

● DC measuring shunt for acquiring the field current
● DC overvoltage protection

Note
The line-side circuit breaker does not have an overcurrent tripping unit and is used to isolate
the excitation system from the supply power system in the event of a fault or for service
work.

3.1.2.2 Additional cabinet modules

Options and project-specific components are integrated in one or more option cabinets.
Examples:
● AC overvoltage protection (option L21)
● Initial excitation
AC initial excitation from the auxiliaries service (option L95 - L99)
DC initial excitation from the power plant battery (option L90 - L94)
● Matching transformer for the second infeed (option Y46)
● Second infeed (option N30 - N39)
● Non-linear field discharge resistor (option Y01)

3.1.2.3 Power converter system

Depending on the associated frame size and redundancy variant, the rectifier system
consists of one or more "rectifier power section" cabinet modules.
The "rectifier power section" cabinet module consists of the following main components:
● One or two power converters
A rectifier comprises a B6C bridge circuit (6 thyristors with miniature fuses, heat sink unit,
busbar mounting and TSE protective circuit, RC elements for damping the commutation
overvoltages, and for the clean switching and blocking of thyristors).
● Fan system per power converter
● AC- and DC-side isolator system (for the optional "repair capability during operation"
variant, option X25)
● De-excitation resistance

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

30 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
3.1.2.4 De-excitation system
The de-excitation system is used for the faster removal of the energy present in the exciter
winding using ohmic de-excitation resistors, e.g. for the fast de-excitation of the generator.
The de-excitation system consists of one or more de-excitation resistors activated using a
thyristor switch. The DC overvoltage protection handles the function of the thyristor switch.
In the standard variant, the de-excitation resistors with linear characteristic are located in the
associated "rectifier power section" cabinet module.
For the optional "non-linear de-excitation resistor" (option Y01) variant, the associated
resistors are configured project-specific and, instead of the de-excitation resistor, installed
with linear characteristic or in an additional cabinet module.

3.1.2.5 Starting converter

For compact units, the excitation system is extended with a starting frequency converter.
The starting frequency converter is a load-commutated medium-voltage frequency converter
with a DC-link reactor and permits the operation of the generator as motor (e.g. for starting
gas turbines).
The starting frequency converter is supplied with power from the medium-voltage level or
with their own transformer and feeds at the load-side the stator busbar of the generator.
As standard, the starting frequency converter is connected as a complete cabinet system
with the cabinet modules of the excitation system. Separate installation of the excitation
system and the starting frequency converter is possible as an option (option M93).
Components of the starting frequency converter:
● Line-side rectifier system with connection busbars for the phases L1, L2, L3 (clockwise
phase sequence)
● Motor-side rectifier system with connection busbars for the phases L1, L2, L3 (clockwise
phase sequence)
● Connection busbars for the protective grounding conductor of the complete starting
frequency converter
● DC-link reactor
● Starting frequency converter - Output-side disconnector (option L51)
The control and monitoring unit of the starting frequency converter is located in the excitation
system control cubicle. The starting frequency converter is controlled exclusively via the
excitation system. Local operation and direct control via the instrumentation and control are
not possible.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 31
3.1.2.6 Control cabinet
The separate "control cubicle" module contains the open-loop and closed-loop control
modules of the excitation system.
Components of the "control cubicle" module:
● Components for the redundant power supply of the control components
● Components to control and monitor the excitation system
● Components for the generator voltage control and the field current control
● Control system for the starting frequency converter (for compact units)
● Display and operator panel for local operation of the excitation system
● Connection panels for acquiring actual generator values
● Connection panels for signal exchange with the higher-level control and protection
system as well as with external components
● Connection panels for auxiliary supplies

3.1.2.7 Display and operator panel

The operating and display device is used for local operation, and is installed in the control
cabinet door.
In addition to the general display and operator functions, such as the specification of
setpoints and the display of actual values and messages, specific signals can be recorded
and archived.

Note
Option K50
The local display and operator panel is omitted for option K50.
In this case, the operation and monitoring is performed only by the higher-level
instrumentation and control. For local operation, a computer can be connected to the
excitation system via an interface installed in the cabinet door.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 32
3.1.3 Architecture of the THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact units

Cabinet modules - sample representation

Standard THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact units consist of the following cabinet
modules, see example in the figure below.
Example of a compact unit (redundant variant of the excitation system power section) with a
starting frequency converter:

SES ⇒ type 950 V, 5100 A

Starting frequency converter ⇒ SINAMICS GL150 type, 4 MW

① Excitation system - "control cubicle" module

② Excitation system - "power converter power section" cabinet module (power converters 1 and 2)
③ Excitation system - "interface cabinet" cabinet module
④ Excitation system - "power converter power section" cabinet module (power converters 3 and 4)
⑤ SINAMICS GL150 starting frequency converter - "DC-link reactor" cabinet module 1)
⑥ SINAMICS GL150 starting frequency converter - "power section" cabinet module 1)
1) Not for individual excitation systems
Figure 3-1 Cabinet modules (example)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 33
Description
3.1 Overview

Architecture of the THYRIPOL excitation systems

<1> For another schematic diagram of the starting frequency converter, see the figure below
Figure 3-2 Architecture of the THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact units (schematic diagram)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

34 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.1 Overview

SINAMICS GL150 starting frequency converter

The SINAMICS GL150 starting frequency converter can be installed line-side with a six- or
twelve-pulse circuit, see the following representative circuits:

<1> If the starting frequency converter is fed by the generator lead, the circuit breaker is located on the secondary side
Figure 3-3 SINAMICS GL150 starting frequency converter with line-side six- and twelve-pulse circuit (schematic
diagrams)

Power spectrum for THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact units

The available power ranges for static excitation systems (SES) and starting frequency
converters (SFC) can be found in the technical specifications. See Chapter Technical data
(Page 243).
Starting frequency converters and static excitation systems can be combined as required.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 35
3.1.4 Operating modes
The operating mode for THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact units can be selected in
the main control room as well as locally at the display and operator panel (local operation).
The release of the local operation is possible using a keyswitch on the door of the control
cubicle.
Operating modes of THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact units:
● Generator voltage control (AUTOMATIC mode)
● Field current control (MANUAL mode)
● Power factor control
● Reactive power control
● Unlocked mode (possible only for commissioning and for special setpoint specifications)
● Test operation (option S22)
● Reactive power compensatory control (option S15)
● Modes of the generator with starting frequency converter (for compact units)
(only from the control desk)

Note
Compact units
For compact units, the starting frequency converter and the required mode are selected only
via the instrumentation and control. The control and monitoring unit of the assigned starting
frequency converter is processed in the compact unit.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 36
3.1.5 Display and operator panel, details
A display and operator panel for local operation of the excitation system is mounted in the
door of the control cubicle.
Base functions of the display and operator panel:
● Local operation of the excitation system
– Excitation On/Off
– AUTOMATIC / MANUAL / REACTIVE POWER CONTROL (optionally available) /
POWER FACTOR CONTROL (optionally available) modes
– Channel switching (for option U15 "Redundant open- and closed-loop control unit")
– Setpoint specifications for the generator voltage, field current, reactive power
(optionally available) and power factor (optionally available)
– Power system stabilizer (PSS) On/Off (option S06/S07)
● Display
– External signals (e.g. status display of the switch-on conditions)
– Operating states
– Generator power diagram with the current operating point
– Actual values and setpoints (e.g. generator voltage, generator current, active and
reactive power, excitation current, excitation voltage)
– Excitation system messages
– Status, values and messages of the assigned starting frequency converter (for
compact units)
● Trace function (recording of signals)
● Data archiving
● Parameterization mode for commissioning
● Administration functions (e.g. access authorizations)
The operation and the detailed functions of the display and operator panel are described in
Chapter Operation (Page 113).

3.2 Starting converter

Starting frequency converters are deployed to accelerate a turbine set or generator to a
specific speed or operate at specific speeds. While the generator is being run in motor
operation by the starting frequency converter, the excitation system adjusts the generator
terminal voltage to match the output voltage of the starting frequency converter. The possible
modes (e.g. normal start) are described in Chapter Operation, Section Operating modes of
the compact system (Page 164).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 37
 Starting frequency converters as part of the THYRIPOL compact unit have medium-voltage
converters with current-source DC link of the Siemens SINAMICS GL150 product series.
The starting frequency converter power is chosen appropriately for the application, the
mechanical and electrical properties of the driven turbine set or generator, refer to the
"Starting frequency converter" Starting converter technical specifications (Page 253) chapter.
The open- and closed-loop control components of the starting frequency converter are
located in the excitation equipment control cubicle.
The following figure shows the schematic diagram of the cabinet modules of a starting
frequency converter in the standard variant.
Example 6-pulse type 6 MW:

Figure 3-4 Cabinet modules of the SINAMICS GL150 starting frequency converter

In the power range with a DC-link power of 2.9 MW to 5 MW, the line- and motor-side
rectifier systems are installed in a shared cabinet module. In this case, the SINAMICS
GL150 starting frequency converter consists of two rather than three cabinet modules with
the appropriately smaller dimensions compared with the standard variant. In this reduced
power range, an optionally required internal motor-side starting frequency converter
disconnector can be installed in the cabinet module of the line- and motor-side rectifier
system.
The following figure is a schematic representation of this configuration. Example 6-pulse
types:

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 38
 Description
3.2 Starting converter

Figure 3-5 Cabinet modules of the SINAMICS GL150 starting frequency converter for 2.9 MW,
4 MW and 5 MW power levels

For starting frequency converters with a DC-link power > 5 MW and a required internal
starting frequency converter disconnector, an additional cabinet module is installed between
the motor-side cabinet module and the control cubicle of the excitation system. In separate
installation of the starting frequency converter and excitation system (option M93), this
additional cabinet module is installed next to the motor-side cabinet module.
For a detailed description of the starting frequency converter, please refer to the SINAMICS
GL150 Equipment Manuals.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 39
3.3 Scope of delivery

Included in the scope of delivery

● THYRIPOL excitation systems (individual excitation systems) are supplied as standard as
closed, integrated cabinet systems (cabinet modules).
● For THYRIPOL compact units, the excitation system and the starting frequency converter
are each supplied as a single cabinet system or as individual transport units. The
customer connects the excitation system with the starting frequency converter locally in
the power plant.
● The installation material required to establish a functional unit for several transport units is
included in the scope of delivery.
● The technical customer documentation for THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact
units is supplied in electronic form (German or English, other languages on request).

Note
● The excitation systems is delivered as standard with thyristor arm fuses and line-side
circuit breakers without an overcurrent tripping unit.
● The starting frequency converters are delivered without thyristor arm fuses and without
line-side circuit breakers.
● THYRIPOL excitation systems and compact units do not have their own system
protection. In the event of a fault (e.g. short-circuit), the maximum permitted shut-off times
must be observed on the plant, see type plate or project-specific specifications. The
protective measures in accordance with the international safety regulations for person
and plant protection (line-side fault protection measures and plant protection concerned
with acquisition of short-circuits and ground faults, and the appropriate activation of the
plant-side circuit breakers and the line-side circuit breakers of the exciter unit) must be
provided by the customer. The purchaser is responsible for the plant protection concept
and the installation of fault protection measures actions.
● The scope of delivery also does not include the line- and motor-side connection cables of
the power circuits, protective grounding conductors and connection cables for auxiliary
supplies and for external signals. They must be provided by the purchaser or the
customer.
● For compact units, the supply cables between the two cabinet systems (except for
DRIVE-CLiQ) for separate installation of the excitation systems and starting frequency
converters are not included in the scope of delivery and must be provided by the
purchaser or customer.
● The installation and commissioning are not included in the scope of delivery.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 40
 Description
3.4 Type plates

3.4 Type plates

The static excitation systems and starting frequency converters are equipped with rating
plates that state the most important technical data.

3.4.1 Excitation system

① Rated voltage values (parameterized values of the system)

② Type-specific system data (see MainData Sheet)

Figure 3-6 Rating plate of the excitation system (example)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 41
3.4.2 Compact system
For compact units, in addition to the rating plates of the starting frequency converter,
matching plates are mounted on the systems to ensure unique assignment of the excitation
system and the starting frequency converter.

Excitation system

① Rated voltage values (parameterized values of the system)

② Type-specific system data (see MainData Sheet)

Figure 3-7 Rating plate of an excitation system of a compact unit (example)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 42
 Description
3.4 Type plates

Figure 3-8 Matching plate of an excitation system of a compact unit (example)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 43
Description
3.4 Type plates

Starting frequency converter

Figure 3-9 Starting frequency converter rating plate (example)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

44 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.4 Type plates

Figure 3-10 Matching plate on the starting frequency converter (example)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 45
3.5 Standards
The following standards and regulations are used, if relevant:

Basic standards/requirement standards

EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-1: Requirements
regarding safety, electrical, thermal, and energy requirements
EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC product stand-
ard including specific test methods
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General
requirements
EN 60146-1-1 Semiconductor converters – General requirements and line-commutated con-
verters, Part 1-1: Defining the basic requirements
EN 60034-1 Turning electrical machines, Part 1: Dimensions and operation characteristics
VDI/VDE 3680 Control of synchronous machines
IEEE 421.1-5 Standard definitions for excitation systems for synchronous machines
References, test standards
EN 50274 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies: Protection against elec-
tric shock - Protection against unintentional direct contact with hazardous live
parts
EN 60068-2-2 Environmental testing - Part 2-2: Tests - Test group B, dry heat
EN 60068-2-6 Environmental testing - Part 2-6: Tests – Fc test, vibration (sinusoidal)
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
EN 60664-1 Insulation coordination for electrical equipment within low-voltage systems,
Part 1: Principles, requirements and checks
EN 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions
EN 60721-3-2
EN 60721-3-3
EN 60990 Regulations for touch protection
DIN VDE 010 0-410 Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 4-41: Protection measures - Protec-
tion against electric shock
Standards for the rated voltage above 1000 VAC (only for starting frequency converter)
EN 60204-11 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 11: Require-
ments for HV equipment for voltages above 1000 VAC or 1500 VDC and not
exceeding 36 kV
EN 50178 Fitting of power installations with electronic equipment

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 46
 Description
3.6 Options

Note
A compact unit consists of the three subsystems: open- and closed-loop control, excitation
system, and starting frequency converter.
Because of their functional and rated voltage (max. 1000 VAC, 1500 VDC), the control and
excitation system cabinets are subject to the Low-Voltage Directive.
The starting frequency converter, and thus the compact unit in its entirety, lies outside the
validity of the Low-Voltage Directive with regard to its rated voltage and must be considered
as being type-tested components/resources declared as conforming. Consequently, a
conformance declaration in accordance with the ISO/IEC 17050-1 standard is prepared for
the compact unit.

3.6 Options

Table 3- 1 List of the options

Option Option designation Description

code
A11 Internal synchronizing voltage sensing If this option is used, the customer does not need to
provide a medium-voltage transformer to provide the
synchronization voltage for the starting frequency con-
verter.
C01 Self-generated 24 VDC from the power plant battery, This option contains the internal formation of the 24 VDC
power supply unit 1 control and electronic voltage supply from the customer's
110/125/220 VDC auxiliary voltage supply (power plant
battery). The voltage level must be selected by specify-
ing the associated option C11 to C22.
C02 Self-generated 24 VDC from the power plant battery, This option contains the internal formation of the 24 VDC
power supply unit 2 control and electronic voltage supply from the customer's
110/125/220 VDC auxiliary voltage supply (power plant
battery). The voltage level must be selected by specify-
ing the associated option C11 to C22.
C03 Self-generated 24 VDC from the 3-phase auxiliary This option contains the internal formation of the 24 VDC
infeed, power supply unit 2 control and electronic voltage supply from the customer's
3-phase auxiliary voltage supply. The voltage level and
the frequency must be selected by specifying the asso-
ciated option C38 to C48.
C11 110 VDC auxiliary voltage supply The DC auxiliary voltage supply for operating the contac-
tors and for forming the internal 24 VDC control voltage
and electronics power supply (by means of power supply
units - option C01, C02) is drawn from a customer's
110 VDC infeed (power plant battery).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 47
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
C12 125 VDC auxiliary voltage supply The DC auxiliary voltage supply for operating the contac-
tors and for forming the internal 24 VDC control voltage
and electronics power supply (by means of power supply
units - option C01, C02) is drawn from a customer's
125 VDC infeed (power plant battery).
C22 220 VDC auxiliary voltage supply The DC auxiliary voltage supply for operating the contac-
tors and for forming the internal 24 VDC control voltage
and electronics power supply (by means of power supply
units - option C01, C02) is drawn from a customer's
220 VDC infeed (power plant battery).
C38 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply 380 VAC / 50 Hz The 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply for the fans of the
power section and, when required, for the formation of
the internal 24 VDC control voltage and electronics pow-
er supply is drawn from a customer's 3-phase 380 VAC
/50 Hz infeed.
C40 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply 400 VAC / 50 Hz The 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply for the fans of the
power section and, when required, for the formation of
the internal 24 VDC control voltage and electronics pow-
er supply is drawn from a customer's 3-phase 400 VAC
/50 Hz infeed.
C41 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply 415 VAC / 50 Hz The 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply for the fans of the
power section and, when required, for the formation of
the internal 24 VDC control voltage and electronics pow-
er supply is drawn from a customer's 3-phase 415 VAC
/50 Hz infeed.
C44 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply 440 VAC / 60 Hz The 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply for the fans of the
power section and, when required, for the formation of
the internal 24 VDC control voltage and electronics pow-
er supply is drawn from a customer's 3-phase
440 VAC/60 Hz infeed.
C46 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply 460 VAC / 60 Hz The 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply for the fans of the
power section and, when required, for the formation of
the internal 24 VDC control voltage and electronics pow-
er supply is drawn from a customer's 3-phase
460 VAC/60 Hz infeed.
C48 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply 480 VAC / 60 Hz The 3-phase auxiliary voltage supply for the fans of the
power section and, when required, for the formation of
the internal 24 VDC control voltage and electronics pow-
er supply is drawn from a customer's 3-phase
480 VAC/60 Hz infeed.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

48 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
C50 Damping circuit (if no generator circuit breaker) This option is designed for a connection voltage of
1.4 kV (SFC) 1.4 kV and contains principally a rectifier circuit with RC
circuit and is connected to the output of the starting
frequency converter to dampen any oscillations (formed
by the cable capacitances and leakage inductances from
the generator and the unit transformer). The damping
circuit is mounted in the reactor cabinet above the DC-
link reactor.
The damping circuit option is required for excitation
compact units for which no generator circuit breaker
exists, because also only there does the constellation
result that parallel to the generator, a unit transformer is
connected to whose primary side cables are also con-
nected. This arrangement forms an oscillating circuit with
a natural frequency in the order of magnitude of 1 kHz.
The damping circuit (option C50, C51 or C52) should
dampen the oscillations excited for each commutation in
the motor-side rectifier so that no early zero passages of
the voltage at the thyristor occur after the quenching.
C51 Damping circuit (if no generator circuit breaker) This option is analogous to option C50, but intended for
2.9 kV (SFC) a supply voltage of up to 2.9 kV.
C52 Damping circuit (if no generator circuit breaker) This option is analogous to option C50, but intended for
4.6 kV (SFC) a supply voltage of up to 4.6 kV.
C61 Duty cycle type 1 Permits a duty cycle with:
• 1. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• 2. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• 3. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• 4. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Cooling phase lasting 120 minutes

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 49
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
C62 Duty cycle type 2 (with ventilation 10 minutes) at Permits a duty cycle with:
40 °C
• Ventilation at 70 % power for 10 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 1 minute
• 1. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Ventilation at 70 % power for 10 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 1 minute
• 2. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Ventilation at 70 % power for 10 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 1 minute
• 3. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Ventilation at 70 % power for 10 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 1 minute
• 4. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Cooling phase lasting 120 minutes
C63 Duty cycle type 2 (with ventilation 10 minutes) at For duty cycle, see option C62
45 °C
C64 Duty cycle type 3 (with ventilation 20 minutes) at • Permits a duty cycle with:
40 °C
• Ventilation at 70 % power for 20 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 1 minute
• 1. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Ventilation at 70 % power for 20 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 1 minute
• 2. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Ventilation at 70 % power for 20 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 1 minute
• 3. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Ventilation at 70 % power for 20 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 1 minute
• 4. Normal start at 100 % power for 4 minutes
• Pause at 0 % power for 2.5 minutes
• Cooling phase lasting 120 minutes
C65 Duty cycle type 3 (with ventilation 20 minutes) at For duty cycle, see option C64
45 °C

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

50 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
E05 Black start This option is a software module that is required for the
start with an auxiliary diesel for startup with limited pow-
er. Different limitations and times may need to be pa-
rameterized.
E07 Phase shifter start This option is a software module. In this case, the tur-
bine is ramped up with decoupled generator and the
starting frequency converter to the oversynchronous
speed.
This requires that a switch is made in the starting fre-
quency converter to a separate parameter set. Then the
machine is synchronized to the network for the genera-
tion of reactive power during runout.
E08 Braking after phase shift start This option is a software module and is deployed either
in conjunction with the option E07 ("phase shifter start")
or as a dedicated option. In this case, the generator is
braked by the starting frequency converter.
E09 Emergency turning (only available after special re- This option is a software module and is deployed in
lease by PG) emergency situations for turning the turbo set (consisting
of turbine and generator) if the "turning equipment" was
not operational. This is done with reduced excitation
current. Because this operating mode under some cir-
cumstances is critical for the turbine set, this operating
mode must be released separately by Siemens Energy.
E10 Hold the firing speed This option is a software module. If the relevant signal
is set by the instrumentation and control while the tur-
bine is being started up by the starting frequency con-
verter, the starting frequency converter remains at the
firing speed. The startup continues only when the "Hold
firing speed" signal is removed again.
E14 Minimum speed limit value for boiler ventilation ex- The "boiler ventilation" function is described in Chapter
ceeded (potential-free contact) Ventilation of the boiler (optionally available) (Page 165).
The option listed here contains only an additional output
signal that signals the overshooting of the minimum
speed limit - normally 23.335% - via a potential-free
contact to the higher-level instrumentation and control.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 51
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
F71 Acceptance test (in the presence of the customer or This option contains a one-day, managed acceptance
a representative) program with the customer at the Vienna factory with:
• Reception of the customer at the visitors' entrance
• Welcome and introductory meeting
• Introduction to the company as a brief presentation
• Visual acceptance of the system
• System test in accordance with acceptance program,
Part 1
• Joint lunch
• System test in accordance with acceptance program,
Part 2
• Debriefing session
A system-specific factory acceptance program will be
provided four weeks before the planned acceptance
date.
F77 Starting frequency converter insulation test with the The insulation test of the starting frequency converter is
customer in Nuremberg, Germany carried out with the customer present (witness test). No
SIMEA employee attends the test.
F81 Factory test of the excitation with generator model As option, the excitation system can be tested with a
(simulator) simulation of the generator. For this purpose, the gener-
ator is integrated in the excitation system using a com-
puter model.
F95 Excitation equipment temperature test The completed excitation system is equipped with tem-
perature measuring sensors mounted previously at de-
fined measuring points and operated at the rated current
with a specified load cycle. The measurement is contin-
ued until the temperatures of all measuring points have
reached their steady state. The resulting temperature
curves are recorded.
F96 Starting frequency converter temperature test The completed starting frequency converter is equipped
with temperature measuring sensors mounted previously
at defined measuring points and operated at the rated
current with a load cycle specified by Siemens Energy.
The measurement is continued until the temperatures of
all measuring points have reached their steady state.
The resulting temperature curves are recorded. This
proves that this load cycle functions thermally.
G21 Instrumentation and control coupling via MODBUS In the standard scope of delivery, the system is supplied
RTU with a PROFIBUS connection for the instrumentation
and control.
This contains the coupling variant to the instrumentation
and control via MODBUS RTU with serial interfaces
(telegrams as for PROFIBUS DP).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

52 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
G22 Instrumentation and control coupling via MODBUS In the standard scope of delivery, the system is supplied
TCP with a PROFIBUS connection for the instrumentation
and control.
This contains the coupling variant to the instrumentation
and control via MODBUS TCP with LAN connection
(telegrams as for PROFIBUS DP).
G72 Output of analog values via the isolation amplifier This option permits the potential-free output of maximum
(4-20 mA / 0-20 mA can be set) eight measured values (field current If, field voltage Uf,
generator current Ig, generator voltage Ug, frequency f,
active power P, reactive power Q, reserved res) via the
isolation amplifier as analog signals (4-20 mA / 0-20 mA
can be set).
G76 Instrumentation and control coupling - hardwired and The option must be engineered plant-specifically, so no
via bus fixed price is possible.
In the standard scope of delivery, the system is supplied
with a PROFIBUS connection for the instrumentation
and control.
This option permits not only the bus connection but also
the exchange of defined signals via digital and analog
inputs/outputs. The signals are transferred isolated.
G79 Direct activation of the de-excitation circuit breaker In the standard, the electrical generator protection acts
via generator protection only directly on the de-excitation circuit breaker when the
open- and closed-loop control of the exciter unit is not
operational. With this option, the electrical generator
protection always acts on the OFF coils of the de-
excitation circuit breaker, irrespective of the state of the
open- and closed-loop control.
G81 Remote diagnostics of the excitation system via WIN This option permits read access to the excitation system
TS via WIN TS for diagnostic purposes. If the customer
specifies the relevant IP address at the start of the pro-
ject, it will already be set in the factory.
In the standard scope of delivery, the system is supplied
with a PROFIBUS connection for the instrumentation
and control.
The connection of the system to the higher-level process
instrumentation and control is made via digital and ana-
log input/output modules located in the control cubicle.
The additional modules are implemented as an addition-
al redundant ET200 station.
The digital input signals are forwarded to the modules
via an isolated coupler. Depending on the system con-
figuration, different voltage levels can be processed
(according to the selected option G96, G97, or G98).
The digital output signals are output isolated via coupling
relays (2 changeover contacts each). Analog signals are
transferred to the analog modules via isolating amplifiers
(0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...10 V possible).
This option is implemented redundantly.
G82 Remote diagnostics of the excitation system via vNC This option permits read access to the excitation system
via vNC for diagnostic purposes.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 53
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
G90 Instrumentation and control coupling – hardwired – With this option, the signal exchange of the system with
SES the instrumentation and control is performed via a one-
wire-per-signal connection, see Chapter Communication
via hardware connection (available as an option).
G91 Hardwired instrumentation and control coupling - Additional extension for the option G90. For a general
starting frequency converter description, see Option G90 (Page 182).
(Supplement to G90)
G92 Hardwired instrumentation and control coupling - cos Additional extension for the option G90. For a general
φ description, see Option G90 (Page 182).
(Supplement to G90)
G93 Hardwired instrumentation and control coupling - Additional extension for the option G90. For a general
reactive power controller description, see Option G90 (Page 182).
(Supplement to G90)
G94 Hardwired instrumentation and control coupling - Additional extension for the option G90. For a general
oscillation damping device description, see Option G90 (Page 182).
(Supplement to G90)
G95 Hardwired instrumentation and control coupling - Additional extension for the option G90. For a general
analog setpoint input description, see Option G90 (Page 182).
(Supplement to G90)
G96 24 V DC signal voltage for hardwired instrumentation The signaling voltage for a hardwired instrumentation
and control coupling and control connection is 24 V DC.

G97 48 V DC signal voltage for hardwired instrumentation The signaling voltage for a hardwired instrumentation
and control coupling and control connection is 48 V DC.
G98 The signal voltage corresponds to the battery voltage The signaling voltage for a hardwired instrumentation
for and control connection is provided by the voltage level of
hardwired instrumentation and control coupling the auxiliary DC power supply (power plant battery)
according to option C11, C12, C22, or C25 (110, 125,
220 or 250 V DC infeed).
K19 Cabinet signaling lamps (ON/OFF, alarm, fault) - This option contains four signaling lamps in the cabinet
SFC door (ON/OFF, alarm, fault) - one 24-V LED lamp in red,
yellow, white, or green for each signal.
• Red: FAULT
• Yellow: ALARM
• White: OFF
• Green: ON
K20 Cabinet signaling lamps (ON/OFF, alarm, fault) - This option contains four signaling lamps in the cabinet
SES door (ON/OFF, alarm, fault) - one 24-V lamp in red,
yellow, white, or green for each signal.
• Red: FAULT
• Yellow: ALARM
• White: OFF
• Green: ON

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

54 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
K22 Cabinet signaling lamps (ON/OFF, alarm, fault) - This option contains eight signaling lamps in the cabinet
compact unit door (ON/OFF, alarm, fault) - one set of 24-V lamps in
red, yellow, white, or green for the SES and one set for
the SFC.
• Red: FAULT
• Yellow: ALARM
• White: OFF
• Green: ON
K23 Interface sockets for generator actual value simula- The test switch has sockets at which the generator actu-
tion and limit alarm signals al values (UG and IG) can be input for test purposes.
In addition, the following signals are provided at floating
contacts:
• Overexcitation limitation
• Underexcitation limitation
• U/f limitation
See also Chapter Test switch (optionally available)
(Page 175)
K24 Further contacts of the de-excitation circuit breaker With this option, an auxiliary contactor gives the custom-
via coupling relay (4 NO contacts + 4 NC contacts) er an additional 4 NO contacts and 4 NC contacts of the
de-excitation circuit breaker wired on the customer ter-
minal.
K25 Version of the interface terminals as spring-loaded Spring-loaded terminals are deployed rather than screw
terminals terminals.
K26 Reading in the limit value contacts from an external With this option, the limit value contacts (alarm and fault)
field-circuit transformer temperature sensor system from an external field-circuit transformer temperature
sensor system are read in.
K27 Reading in the limit value contacts from an external With this option, the limit value contacts (alarm and fault)
SFC transformer temperature sensor system from external SFC transformer temperature sensor sys-
tem are read in.
K32 Notebook commissioning For commissioning purposes, a standard notebook with
preinstalled software and all required cables is made
available.
K43 Set of analog door instruments (6 items) for Ug, Ig, Uf, With this option, the following quantities are represented
If, f, P with analog pointer instruments in the door of the control
cabinet:
• Generator voltage
• Generator current
• Field voltage
• Field current
• Frequency
• Active power
K50 No local display and operator panel Systems with this option do not have any display and
operator panel.
K51 Interlocking in the switch-on circuit of the external This option permits the activation of the external SFC
SFC disconnecting switch with Ug < 5 % disconnector only below a generator voltage of 5 %.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 55
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
K52 Fan supply can be switched to 3-phase auxiliary With this option, the supply voltage of the cooling fans
infeed can be switched to 3-phase auxiliary infeed. This permits
the operation of the cooling fans even when the rated
connection voltage on the main infeed is not available.
The availability of the cooling fans is also increased.
K57 Radio clock input, version DCF receiver This option involves an additional receiver module, type
DCF 77, which synchronizes (time) the SIMATIC control
with an external radio clock.
K58 Radio clock input, version GPS receiver This option involves an additional GPS receiver module,
which synchronizes the SIMATIC control with an exter-
nal radio
clock.
K59 Time synchronization with an NTP server With this option, the time of the SIMATIC control is syn-
chronized with an NTP server
K60 Evaluation of transformer temperature via tempera- This option contains an evaluation unit that measures
ture monitoring relay SIEMENS 3RS1041 - SES the temperatures at certain points in the exciter trans-
transformer former using resistance thermometers. Normally, the
three windings and the middle leg of the transformer are
monitored. A pre-alarm and a limit temperature are
monitored as digital signals. The values must be speci-
fied in the plant data sheet. The SIEMENS 3RS1041
temperature monitoring relay used is suitable for evalu-
ating the following sensors: PT100/1000, KTY83/84, and
NTC 3.
K61 Evaluation of transformer temperature via tempera- This option contains an evaluation unit that measures
ture monitoring relay SIEMENS 3RS1041 - SFC the temperatures at certain points in the starting fre-
transformer, 6-pulse or 12-pulse version quency converter transformer using resistance ther-
mometers. Normally, the three windings and the middle
leg of the transformer are monitored. A pre-alarm and a
limit temperature are monitored as digital signals. The
values must be specified in the plant data sheet. In the
6-pulse version of the SFC, this option contains one
evaluation unit while the 12-pulse version (two second-
ary winding systems of the SFC transformer) has two
evaluation units. The SIEMENS 3RS1041 temperature
monitoring relay used is suitable for evaluating the fol-
lowing sensors: PT100/1000, KTY83/84, and NTC 3.
K62 PT100 transformer temperature evaluation - SES This option contains an additional evaluation unit that
transformer measures the temperatures at given points in the exciter
transformer using PT100 resistance thermometers.
Normally, the three windings and the middle leg of the
transformer are monitored.
K63 PT100 transformer temperature evaluation - SFC This option contains an additional evaluation unit that
transformer, 6/12-pulse variant measures the temperatures at given points in the start-
ing frequency converter transformer using PT100 re-
sistance thermometers. Normally, the three windings
and the middle leg of the transformer are monitored.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

56 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
K64 Preparation for instrumentation and control connec- The exciter cabinet is normally connected to the instru-
tion via optic fibers mentation and control using a PROFIBUS connection via
a CP342-5 communications processor and a conven-
tional data cable. With this option, the control cabinet is
prepared for the mounting of an OLM per SIMATIC
channel. This option contains the following scope of
delivery for both channels:
• Power supply for the OLM
• Circuit breaker for the OLM
• Cabinet-internal bus cable laid to the communica-
tions module
• Reserved slot for the OLM
Important note:
The actual OLM is provided by the instrumentation and
control.
K65 PT100 transformer temperature evaluation - SES This option contains an evaluation unit that measures
transformer for a second power infeed the temperatures at certain points in the field-circuit
transformer of the second power infeed using PT100
resistance thermometers. Normally, the three windings
and the middle leg of the transformer are monitored. A
pre-alarm and a limit temperature are monitored as digi-
tal signals. The values must be specified in the plant
data sheet.
L05 Inductive cable damping With this option, di/dt reactors (up to 9 toroidal cores)
are installed in the motor-side and, if required, in the
line-side connection busbars.
L10 Cabinet power socket outlet in the country-specific With this option, rather than the Central European
variant, F / PL / CZ / SK grounded power socket, a country-specific variant is
used. The cabinet power socket outlet is installed in the
control cubicle and protected using a 13 A / 30 mA
RCBO.
L11 Cabinet power socket outlet in the country-specific See L10
variant, Switzerland
L12 Cabinet power socket outlet in the country-specific See L10
variant, Great Britain / Ireland
L13 Cabinet power socket outlet in the country-specific See L10
variant, USA / Canada
L14 Cabinet power socket outlet in the country-specific See L10
variant, Italy
L15 Cabinet power socket outlet in the country-specific See L10
variant, Brazil
L20 No cabinet power socket outlet With this option, the cabinet power socket outlet is elimi-
nated. The necessary single-phase AC auxiliary infeed is
also eliminated if none of the following options is select-
ed: cabinet heating (option L54, L55, L58) and cabinet
lighting (option N86).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 57
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
L21 AC overvoltage protection This option involves an overvoltage protection
(SICROWBAR), including evaluation of a fuse-triggering
message of the associated installed fuse disconnecting
switch.
On failure, note the procedure in Chapter Replacement
of the AC overvoltage protection (option L21)
(Page 235).
L51 SFC output disconnector in the starting frequency The option includes a disconnector that separates the
converter starting frequency converter from the startup busbars.
L54 Cabinet heating per cabinet; thermostat-regulated This option contains a 100 W heater with thermostat for
120 VAC each cabinet. The power is supplied to the heating unit
from the customer's 1-phase 120 VAC infeed.
L55 Cabinet heating per cabinet; thermostat-regulated This option contains a 100 W heater with thermostat for
230 VAC each cabinet. The power is supplied to the heating unit
from the customer's 1-phase 230 VAC infeed.
L58 Cabinet heating per cabinet; thermostat-regulated This option contains a 100 W heater with thermostat and
and hygrostat-regulated 120 - 240 VAC hygrostat for each cabinet. The power is supplied to the
heating unit from the customer's 1-phase 120-230 VAC
infeed.
L62 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation con- With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
tact, for IEN ≤ 2050 ADC, UfN ≤ 420 VDC, excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
US ≤ 575 VAC maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 2050 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 420 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 575 VAC.
L63 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation con- With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
tact, for IEN ≤ 2400 ADC, UfN ≤ 420 VDC, excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
US ≤ 575 VAC maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 2400 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 420 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 575 VAC.
L64 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation con- With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
tact, for IEN ≤ 1800 ADC, UfN ≤ 500 VDC, excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
US ≤ 950 VAC maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 1800 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 500 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 950 VAC.
L65 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation contact, With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
for IEN ≤ 2400 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 750 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 2400 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 750 VAC.
L66 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation contact, With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
for IEN ≤ 4500 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 750 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 4500 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 750 VAC.
L67 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation contact, With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
for IEN ≤ 4500 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 950 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 4500 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 950 VAC.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

58 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
L68 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation contact, With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
for IEN ≤ 7700 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 750 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 7700 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 750 VAC.
L69 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation contact, With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
for IEN ≤ 6800 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 750 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 6800 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 750 VAC.
L70 DC de-excitation switch without de-excitation contact, With this option, a DC de-excitation switch without de-
for IEN ≤ 6800 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 950 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 6800 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 950 VAC.
L72 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 2050 ADC, UfN ≤ 420 VDC, US ≤ 575 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 2050 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 420 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 575 VAC.
L73 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 2400 ADC, UfN ≤ 420 VDC, US ≤ 575 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 2400 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 420 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 575 VAC.
L74 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 1800 ADC, UfN ≤ 500 VDC, US ≤ 950 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 1800 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 500 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 950 VAC.
L75 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 2400 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 750 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 2400 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 750 VAC.
L76 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 4500 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 750 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 4500 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 750 VAC.
L77 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 4500 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 950 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 4500 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 950 VAC.
L78 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 7700 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 750 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 7700 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 750 VAC.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 59
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
L79 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 6800 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 750 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 6800 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 750 VAC.
L80 DC de-excitation switch with de-excitation contact, for With this option, a DC de-excitation switch with de-
IEN ≤ 6800 ADC, UfN ≤ 700 VDC, US ≤ 950 VAC excitation contact is selected, which is suitable for a
maximum continuous excitation current IEN ≤ 6800 ADC,
rated excitation voltage UfN ≤ 700 VDC, AC supply volt-
age US ≤ 950 VAC.
L87 Rotor ground-fault protection (Bender Corp.) This option includes a rotor ground-fault protection
IRDH275-435 (Bender Corp.), including auxiliary voltage
supply, and applies to voltages up to 650 VDC output
voltage.
L88 Rotor ground-fault protection (Bender Corp.) for This option includes a rotor ground-fault protection
higher voltages IRDH275-435 (Bender Corp.) with a coupling device for
voltages up to 1760 VDC, including auxiliary voltage
supply.
L89 Preparation for installation of a coupling module This option includes preparation for installation of a cou-
(type: Beckwith M-3921) for the rotor ground fault pling module, type M-3921 (Beckwith) for rotor ground
protection fault protection in the excitation system. This option
contains predrilled mounting holes, mounting material,
internal cabinet wiring, conductor tagging, and the nec-
essary documentation. The coupling module is not in-
cluded in the scope of delivery of this option.
L90 DC initial excitation from the power plant battery Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲500 A; UfN ≲350 V) available) (Page 173)
L91 DC initial excitation from the power plant battery Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲500 A; UfN ≲700 V) available) (Page 173)
L92 DC initial excitation from the power plant battery Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲1100 A; UfN ≲350 V) available) (Page 173)
L93 DC initial excitation from the power plant battery Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲1100 A; UfN ≲700 V) available) (Page 173)
L94 DC initial excitation from the power plant battery Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲2500 A; UfN ≲700 V) available) (Page 173)
L95 AC initial excitation from the auxiliary power supply Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲500 A; UfN ≲350 V) available) (Page 173)
L96 AC initial excitation from the auxiliary power supply Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲500 A; UfN ≲700 V) available) (Page 173)
L97 AC initial excitation from the auxiliary power supply Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲1100 A; UfN ≲350 V) available) (Page 173)
L98 AC initial excitation from the auxiliary power supply Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲1100 A; UfN ≲700 V) available) (Page 173)
L99 AC initial excitation from the auxiliary power supply Description, refer to Chapter Initial excitation (optionally
(for generators with IF0 ≲2500 A; UfN ≲700 V) available) (Page 173)
M11 Filter mats at the air intake For the IP32 degree of protection of the starting frequen-
cy converter, additional filter mats are provided for filter-
ing the drawn-in air.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

60 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
M13 Connection from the top - SFC line side In the standard scope, the power cables are fed into and
connected to the cabinet system from below. This option
permits a connection from above.
M18 Type plate engraved on the outer side. For this option, the type plate of the excitation equipment
/ compact unit is located on the outer side of the control
cubicle.
M20 Upgrading the excitation equipment for operation up This option allows the system to be operated at ambient
to an ambient temperature of 45 °C temperatures as high as 45° C.
See Chapter Technical data (Page 243) for further de-
tails.
M21 Upgrading the SES for operation up to an ambient This option allows the system to be operated at ambient
temperature of 45 °C, without redundant roof- temperatures as high as 45 °C, but without redundancy
mounted fans of the fans on the control cubicle or interface cabinet.
See Chapter Technical data (Page 243) for further de-
tails.
M25 Upgrading the excitation equipment for operation up This option allows the system to be operated at ambient
to an ambient temperature of 50 °C temperatures as high as 50° C.
See Chapter Technical data (Page 243) for further de-
tails.
M26 Upgrading the SES for operation up to an ambient This option allows the system to be operated at ambient
temperature of 50 °C, without redundant roof- temperatures as high as 50 °C, but without redundancy
mounted fans of the fans on the control cubicle or interface cabinet.
See Chapter Technical data (Page 243) for further de-
tails.
M30 Installation altitude up to 2000 m SES This option allows operation of the excitation system at
altitudes up to 2,000 m above sea level.
M31 Installation altitude up to 4000 m SES This option allows operation of the excitation system at
altitudes up to 4,000 m above sea level.
M38 Swivel lever locking system for padlock, for each With this option, the plant/system doors are equipped
door with a swivel lever locking system to attach a padlock.
As standard, a swivel lever locking system with 3 mm
two-way key bit is used.
M40 Swivel lever locking system with lock barrel, for each This option equips the system doors with a swivel lever
door locking system with lock barrel.
As standard, a swivel lever locking system with 3 mm
two-way key bit is used.
M41 IP41 degree of protection of the starting frequency This option upgrades the starting frequency converter for
converter operation with IP41 degree of protection.
Degree of protection IP42 is achieved if, in addition to
option M41, option M11 (filter mats) is selected
M43 Degree of protection IP43 of the excitation equipment This option allows the excitation equipment to be oper-
(only for the excitation equipment, cannot be used for ated with IP43 degree of protection.
SFC)
M44 Degree of protection IP43 of the excitation equipment This option allows the excitation equipment to be oper-
with increased dust protection (only for the excitation ated with IP43 degree of protection; filter mats for filter
equipment, cannot be used for SFC) class G3 in accordance with DIN EN 779 are deployed
(increased dust protection).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 61
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
M58 Arc-tested cabinet variant with gilled doors (SFC) This option equips the cabinets with "gilled doors".
This option also includes additional pressure-relief flaps.
This option minimizes the effects of an occurrence of an
arc flashover.
M61 Redundant fan in the power section (SES) This option provides fan redundancy in the power sec-
tion of the excitation system.
M65 Low-noise fan (SFC) This option provides special fans that reduce the noise
level compared with the standard variant
M66 Upgrading the SFC for operation up to an ambient This option allows the system to be operated at tempera-
temperature of 50 °C tures as high as 50° C.
M76 Modified door stop for control cabinets (SFC), for This option enables the side bearing the door hinges of a
each door particular cabinet to be changed from the standard. The
option has to be ordered once for each set of door hing-
es to be changed.
M78 Connection from the top - SFC motor side In the standard scope, the power cables are fed into and
connected to the cabinet system from below. This option
permits a connection from above.
M83 Power connections according to the US ANSI stand- In the standard version, the holes for the cable lugs on
ard the power connections are implemented according to the
DIN standard. If this option is used, the holes for the
cable lugs are implemented according to the US ANSI
standard.
M90 Smaller footprint With this option, the footprint is made smaller by combin-
ing a "power converter power section" cabinet module
with an "interface cabinet" cabinet module. This option is
only available for the following types with a power sec-
tion configuration 1 × 100 %:
• 575/1375
• 750/1600
M91 Connection from the top - AC power infeed (SES) In the standard scope, the power cables are fed into and
connected to the cabinet system from below. This option
permits a connection from above.
M92 Connection from the top - DC output (SES) In the standard scope, the power cables are fed into and
connected to the cabinet system from below. This option
permits a connection from above.
M93 Separate installation of SFC and SES This option permits the separate installation of the com-
pact unit, where the exciter part for the starting frequen-
cy converter is installed separately.
M96 Connection from the top - control cubicle This option permits the cable connection of the control
cubicle of the excitation equipment from above.
M97 SES increased insulation This option offers improved protection against short-
circuits and arc formation in the system.
This option provides a fixed polycarbonate insulation
between the phases of the AC circuit. The cable connec-
tion area and the busbars to the individual rectifiers are
insulated from each other.
This option does not include the fixed insulation of the
live parts to non-conducting grounded parts.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

62 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
N19 Control of the transformer tap changer By default, the commands (up/down) are output to the
transformer tap changer via PROFIBUS.
This option includes two additional digital outputs fed to
relays. For each relay, a NO contact (up/down) is made
available at terminals. The notification is made via the
instrumentation and control. This option is used to
change the voltage of the unit transformer.
N30 Second power infeed 690 V/320 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 400 mm wide and is dimensioned for a maxi-
mum connection voltage of 690 V and a rated current of
320 A (DC output).
N31 Second power infeed 690 V/480 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 400 mm wide and dimensioned for a maximum
connection voltage of 690 V and a rated current of 480 A
(DC output).
N32 Second power infeed 690 V/760 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 600 mm wide and dimensioned for a maximum
connection voltage of 690 V and a rated current of 760 A
(DC output).
N33 Second power infeed 750 V/1200 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 600 mm wide and dimensioned for a maximum
connection voltage of 750 V and a rated current of
1200 A (DC output).
N34 Second power infeed 750 V/2200 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 900 mm wide and dimensioned for a maximum
connection voltage of 750 V and a rated current of
2200 A.
N35 Second power infeed 750 V/4500 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 900 mm wide and dimensioned for a maximum
connection voltage of 750 V and a rated current of
4500 A.
N37 Second power infeed 950 V/2000 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 600 mm wide and dimensioned for a maximum
connection voltage of 950 V and a rated current of
2000 A (DC output).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 63
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
N38 Second power infeed 950 V/3600 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 900 mm wide and dimensioned for a maximum
connection voltage of 950 V and a rated current of
3600 A.
N39 Second power infeed 950 V/5100 A In addition to the main infeed, a second AC power in-
feed, for example, can be used to implement black start
functionality using an AC circuit breaker. The infeed
panel is 900 mm wide and dimensioned for a maximum
connection voltage of 950 V and a rated current of
5100 A.
N54 Surge voltage protector on the LSPC This option protects the SFC from surge voltages on the
line-side input caused, for example, caused by switching
actions upstream of the SFC circuit breaker or by light-
ning strikes. These overvoltages can pose a danger to
the converter thyristors. To limit the voltage peaks, non-
sparking overvoltage limiters made of metal oxide are
deployed. They are connected between the phases in a
star configuration.
This option is recommended when the specified peak
reverse voltages of the thyristors cannot be maintained.
N56 Surge voltage protector on the MSPC This option protects the SFC from surge voltages on the
motor-side output that can occur for certain fault states
(e.g. when the generator voltage exceeds the rated
output voltage of the SFC (ramp-up voltage setpoint)).
To limit the voltage peaks, non-sparking overvoltage
limiters made of metal oxide are deployed. They are
connected between the phases in a star configuration.
This option is recommended when the specified peak
reverse voltages of the thyristors cannot be maintained.
N58 SFC line-side fuses This option can be used for SFC types with rated power
2.9 MW to 5.0 MW (types with cross stacks -AB5, -AA5,
-AC5) when the required SFC transformer short-circuit
voltage cannot be maintained.

N82 Single channel generator actual value feeding for This option must be considered when the generator
redundant controllers actual value measurement is not present redundantly on
the system, but the SEE has redundant open- and
closed-loop control.
N83 Execution of the generator actual value acquisition This option allows selection of the generator actual value
for 16 2/3 Hz acquisition for 16 2/3 Hz.
N86 Cabinet lighting per cabinet, 100 V AC-240 V AC This option includes illumination (two LEDs) for each
cabinet.
The customer must provide the one-phase AC supply.
S05 Rotor temperature display calculated from the ohmic This option is a software module. The rotor temperature
rotor resistance software package is calculated from the ohmic rotor resistance, transferred
to the instrumentation and control and displayed in the
operator panel.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

64 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
S06 Power stabilization unit software package Description, refer to Chapter Oscillation damping device
(IEEE421.5 model PSS 3B) (optionally available) (Page 159)
S07 Power stabilization unit software package Description, refer to Chapter Oscillation damping device
(IEEE421.5 model PSS 2B) (optionally available) (Page 159)
S08 Back-to-back start software package Description, refer to Chapter Back-to-back start (option-
ally available) (Page 167)
S12 Software package for two ramp-up profiles Description, refer to Chapter Starting with two starting
profiles (optionally available) (Page 164)
S13 Hardware for communication between SES This option establishes the communication between the
excitation systems for the "transverse start" or "reactive
power compensatory control" function.
S14 Software package cross-over start Description, refer to Chapter Transverse start (optionally
available) (Page 176)
S15 Reactive power compensatory control software Description, refer to Chapter Reactive power compensa-
package tory control (optionally available) (Page 161)
S18 Converter braking for HEPP Description, refer to Chapter Water-power operating
modes (Page 166)
S19 Converter start for HEPP (external SFC controlled via Description, refer to Chapter Water-power operating
the SES) modes (Page 166)
S22 Test excitation software package Description, refer to Chapter Test excitation (optionally
available) (Page 168)
S23 Self-contained start (black start) software package Description, refer to Chapter Self-contained starting
(optionally available) (Page 166)
S30 Version with cos φ control Description, refer to Chapter Reactive power control and
power factor control - option S31 (Page 160)
S31 Version with reactive power control Description, refer to Chapter Reactive power control and
power factor control - option S31 (Page 160)
S32 Parameter switchover for a power system stabilizer With this option, it is possible to switch between two
parameter sets for the power system stabilizer. This is
done by wiring a binary input to customer terminals.
S45 Electrical braking for HEPP software package Description, refer to Chapter Water-power operating
modes (Page 166)
U15 Redundant open- and closed-loop control - SES This option includes a redundant version of the open-
and closed-loop control of the excitation equipment.
U34 SES earthquake resistance Expanded documentation relating to earthquake re-
quirements. At the request of the customer, additional
proof can be supplied.
X20 Project-specific design of the auxiliary infeeds This option permits project-specific design of the auxilia-
ry infeeds. The auxiliary infeeds including all associated
protection elements (e.g. MCBs) are adapted to the
project-specific power requirement. The necessary pro-
ject-specific power requirement is communicated to the
customer with the preliminary documentation.
X25 Maintenance during operation Description, refer to Chapter Repair capability during
operation of the power section (Page 218)
X28 No line-side circuit breaker If the system has a DC de-excitation switch (options L62
to L80), this option means that the line-side circuit
breaker can be eliminated.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 65
Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
X40 Withdrawable 3WL breaker for the main infeed With this option, the AC non-automatic circuit breaker is
not implemented as permanently-installed circuit breaker
but using plug-in technology.
This option also includes redundant fans in the interface
cabinet for an additional forced air cooling.
X41 Withdrawable 3WL breaker for the second power With this option, the AC non-automatic circuit breaker is
infeed not implemented as permanently-installed circuit breaker
but using plug-in technology.
This option also includes redundant fans in the interface
cabinet for an additional forced air cooling.
Y01 Non-linear de-excitation resistor This option permits the deployment of a non-linear de-
excitation resistor.
Y08 Cabinet with a special paint finish, per cabinet run- As standard, the cabinets are supplied in the RAL 7035
ning meter color. This option allows customer-specific color re-
quirements to be satisfied.
Y09 Cabinet with a special RAL color, per cabinet running As standard, the cabinets are supplied in the RAL 7035
meter color. With this option, the cabinets themselves are pro-
duced in the specified RAL color coding.
Y11 1-phase AC auxiliary power supply With this option, the voltage and frequency for the 1-
phase AC auxiliary power supply must be specified.
Y12 Exciter transformer overcurrent protection With this option, an overcurrent protection relay (e.g. of
the SIPROTEC or BASLER product family) is installed in
the excitation system. The excitation system supplies the
device with power. The relay outputs of the device are
wired to customer terminals. The customer is responsi-
ble for setting and evaluating the signals and the relay.
The type of the surge voltage protection relay is selected
depending on the specific order.
Note: Note that the installation of the surge voltage pro-
tection device in the cabinet door can reduce the degree
of protection of the excitation system.
Y20 Customer-specific wiring colors In the base version, the internal wiring is implemented so
that the > 60 V and converter signals are provided with
black cables and the <60 V signals with gray cables.
With this option, the excitation system is supplied retain-
ing the three signal types and details of the desired col-
ors.
Y31 Operating instructions in the customer-specific lan- Rather than the standardized documentation in German
guage or English, the operating instructions are supplied in the
desired language.
Y32 Customer-specific language, HMI device In the base version, the systems are supplied with an
operator panel in English or German. If required, other
languages can be supplied.
Y33 Customer-specific cover sheet Rather than the standardized documentation, the cover
sheet for the system-specific documentation is supplied
in accordance with the customer's requirements.
Y34 Circuit manual in the customer-specific language Rather than the standardized documentation in German
or English, the circuit manual is supplied in the desired
language.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

66 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Description
3.6 Options

Option Option designation Description

code
Y35 Customer-specific language, HMI device and list The systems are supplied with an HMI device in English
manuals or German a standard. With option Y35, both the operat-
ing elements of the HMI device and the parameter texts,
message texts, and list manuals are translated into the
desired language.
Y36 Customer-specific cabinet labeling language Rather than the standardized labeling in German or
English, the cabinet is labeled in the desired language.
Y45 Load cycle that is different from the standard (SFC) A load cycle that is different from the standard can be
implemented with this option. See also Chapter Load
cycle (Page 252)
Y46 Matching transformer for the second power infeed This option contains an additional cabinet with a match-
ing transformer for a second power infeed (options N30
to N39).
Y49 RC circuit at the output (shaft voltage suppression) It is a circuit (fuse - resistor - capacitor) from the P and N
conductors of the DC side to ground. It filters unwanted
disturbance voltages that might be coupled into the shaft
through the power converter. This circuit is fitted in an
options cabinet.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 67
Preparations for use 4
4.1 Note

4.1.1 Installation instructions

In the following sections it is assumed that a cabinet system is involved that is installed after
transportation, is not yet connected to the line supply and is therefore in a no voltage
condition.

NOTICE
Secure the installation location and mark
The system must be set up in such a way that risks to individuals are ruled out in the event
of a fault. When using the excitation system or compact system outside industrial areas
secure against unauthorized entry using suitable equipment (e.g. guard fences) and attach
the appropriate warning signs.
The marking of the electrical operating area must be made in agreement with the local
safety regulations and national safety guidelines.

NOTICE
Qualified personnel
Ensure that only qualified personnel have access to the system.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 69
Preparations for use
4.2 General

4.1.2 Note for compact systems

Compact units are delivered as separate transport units and normally installed next to each
other locally. Grounding bars are provided in the excitation equipment and in the starting
frequency converter. Prior to commissioning, these grounding bars must be attached using
the cables (protective grounding conductor 2 x 185 mm2) through the entry bushes for this
purpose. Observe the tightening torques, Chapter Torques for screw connections (Page 80).

WARNING
Connecting the grounding bars
For reasons of personal safety, the grounding bars of the excitation system and of the
starting frequency converter must be connected with the cables if the distance between the
excitation system and the starting frequency converter cabinet units is ≤ 3 m. The low-
resistance continuity of this protection grounding conductor must be checked after the
installation. This cable connection of the grounding bars can be omitted where equivalent
low-resistance continuity between the two SES and SFC cabinet units exists locally
because of the natural properties of the parts used in the design. (The conductor material
and cross-section of the protective bonding must be considered).
No direct connection of the grounding bars is required for separations >3 m.
Irrespective of this additional connection, the excitation system and the starting frequency
converter must each be connected to the grounding system in the line-connection area with
the required cross-section (refer to local applicable safety regulations).

The excitation system and starting frequency converters can be installed as separate cabinet
units for compact units. The following must be observed:

NOTICE
Maximum distance between the excitation system and starting frequency converters in
compact units
When the excitation system and the starting frequency converter are installed separately
(option M93), the distance between the two cabinet units must be chosen so that the length
of the supply cables between the control cubicle of the excitation system and the starting
frequency converter does not exceed 70 m.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

70 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Preparations for use
4.2 General

4.2 General

4.2.1 Container installation / installation in the power house

The following items must be observed for the installation in a container or the installation in
the power house:
● Transport routes to the switchgear room
● Maneuvering and interim storage areas
● Condition and load capacity of the floor
● Illumination, heating, power and water supply
● Size of the scaffolding and base rails
● Laying of the power cable
● Installation of the grounding system and protective ground conductors

4.2.2 Interim storage

Interim storage of the transport units
● Where possible, in the original packaging
● Weather-protected
● Protected against damage
● The transport units must be accompanied by an adequate amount of desiccant for the
transportation and storage time so that the relative air humidity within the barrier cover is
maintained for at least 12 months for the entire transportation and storage time
(calculation according to DIN 55474).
Storage conditions, see Table B-2 Environmental class in accordance with DIN IEC
60721-3 Part 1 to 3 (Page 251)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 71
4.3 Transportation
The compact systems and individual excitations are designed for mounting in the container
and for installation in the power house. As the dimensioned drawing shows, the compact
system is delivered in at least two transport units, see system-specific dimensioned drawing.
The isolation point lies between the starting converter power section and the control cabinet
on the exciter side. Individual exciter units with a maximum weight of approximately 5 t can
be delivered as one transport unit.
The cabinet groups were designed for smallest possible floor area with the maximum
specified height. No parts are removed for the truck transport to the container installation and
for the transport of the completed container on a truck or a ship.
Exception:
To reduce the loading height, the roof fan is normally dismounted for the starting converter
and supplied as accessory.

NOTICE
Proper transport
The transport units must only be transported by trained personnel using the permitted
means of transportation and lifting equipment.
The equipment must always be positioned upright and must not be tilted.

4.3.1 Tilt and shock indicators

The tilt and shock indicators show whether prohibited actions (tilting, impact) act on the
transport unit during loading and transportation. Both indicators show in which direction the
limit values are being violated.
The tilt indicator (e.g. TIP-N-TELL) monitors whether the transport unit has been loaded and
transported upright as prescribed. If it has been tilted, this can be recognized clearly from the
colored tip of the arrow.
The tilt indicator triggers for a tilt angle of 60°.
The shock indicator (e.g. DROP-N-TELL) is attached to the transport units to provide
evidence of transport damage from shock or impact. It shows any violation as well as the
direction of any maximum acceleration set out beforehand in "g" (gravitational acceleration).
Shock indicators are set with a limit value of 10 g for THYRIPOL systems.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 72
 Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation

Figure 4-1 Tilt indicator, shock indicator

Figure 4-2 Indicators triggered (examples)

If the tilt or impact indicator has triggered, contact your Siemens service partner.

4.3.2 Base frame

The individual transport units are already mounted on base frames in the factory, see
dimensioned drawing. Base frames in the U100 profile in accordance with DIN 1026 in the
cabinet color are used. The base frames remain on the cabinet groups even after the final
installation in the power plant.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 73
Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation

4.3.3 Transportation altitude

The transport units must be transported and stored in the upright position. To reduce the
loading height, the roof fan is normally dismounted for the starting converter and supplied as
accessory.
The exact dimensions of the cabinet groups can be obtained from the project-specific
dimensioned drawing.

4.3.4 Lifting and transportation

WARNING
Possible consequences of improper transport
The transport units must always be positioned upright and must not be tilted.
Improper transportation, use of inadequate tools, and access by unauthorized persons can
result in accidents and subsequently death, serious injury, or property damage.
Ensure that the transport units are only transported by trained personnel using a permitted
means of transport and permitted hoisting gear.

WARNING
Possible consequences caused by the use of non-approved hoisting gear
Damaged, too short or underdimensioned ropes and crane belts must not be used.
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Ensure that the used ropes and crane belts are correctly dimensioned.

Note
Center of gravity
The position of the center of gravity must be identified in the factory with labels on the
cabinets or can be found on the dimensioned drawing.

With crane and pallet

The crane belts must be selected appropriately long and hung outside so that under load,
where possible, they place no forces on the walls of the transport unit. The ropes are looped
at the ends of the wooden pallets. Shoring must be to used for short belts. When
transporting, pay particular attention to the center of gravity of the transport unit.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

74 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation

With fork lift and pallet

Lifting is possible with suitable forks:
● Longitudinal with forks that extend beyond the center of gravity.
● Lateral with adjustable-width forks in the provided openings of the pallets.
The position of the center of gravity must be identified in the factory with labels on the
cabinets or can be found on the dimensioned drawing.

Removing the pallet

The pallet is removed at the installation location. A crane is required to the lift the cabinet
unit.
The pallet is screwed down. Remove the screws, pull the pallet forwards and place the
cabinet unit carefully.

With crane, without pallet

This requires holes with 63 mm diameter suitable for insertion of pipes to be provided in the
base frame, as shown in the dimensioned drawings.
E.g. for Ø = 63 mm:
Pipe > 60 mm × 8 mm with circular hollow section in accordance with DIN EN 10220-60x8-
S235JR
Use four crane straps of equal length and a crane hook beam for stable lifting of the cabinet.
Insert appropriately long crane belts so that no force is exerted to the walls of the transport
unit when under load. End caps fastened on the pipes increase safety when carried.
Maximum separation of the belts to the same pipe: Belt center to belt center = 1250 mm.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 75
Preparations for use
4.3 Transportation

<1> Fastened end caps

Figure 4-3 Transport with crane, without pallet

With rollers and without pallet

Lower the transport unit onto the roller pads (armored rollers) or pipes (approximately 30 mm
diameter). The roller pads must be distributed so that the transport unit is supported outside
and at the abutting surfaces between the fields.

With roller pry bars and without pallet

Raise the transport unit first on one side and then on the other side using roller pry bars and
lower slowly at the mounting location. Apply roller pry bars only at the corners of the
transport units.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

76 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Preparations for use
4.4 Completeness and transport damage

4.4 Completeness and transport damage

Check for completeness

● Check that the delivery is complete using the delivery slips and list of accessories.
● Check that the accessories are complete.

Check for transport damage

● Open the packaging temporarily at a location that is protected from the elements for the
purposes of detecting any concealed damage. Only remove the packaging completely at
the assembly area so that the system remains as clean as possible.
● Report any defects and transport damage ascertained to the carrier immediately and
refuse to accept the delivery where necessary.
● Contact your Siemens service partner in the event of defects or transport damage as well
as limit value violations for the tilt and shock indicators.
See also Chapter Tilt and shock indicators (Page 72).
● Have transport damage rectified because otherwise the assembly cannot begin.
● Restore packaging.

Note
Measures to avoid damage when unloading
• Insert appropriately long crane belts as far as possible outside so that no force is exerted
to the walls of the transport unit when under load.
• Do not step on the roof of the transport units.
• Note the instructions on the packaging.
• Unload the transport units with their packaging completely and leave them packaged as
long as possible.
• Do not damage the PE protective foil.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 77
4.5 Transport to the installation location
● To avoid unnecessary long distances, unload transport units and place them as near as
possible to the installation location.
● Move transport units as long and as far as possible on their wooden pallets. To ensure
that the system remains clean and undamaged, do not remove any packaging
unnecessarily.
● Move the transport units in the building with lifting trucks, fork lifts or on rollers to the
installation location.
● Place transport units in the correct order in front of the installation location (leave
clearances for installation).
● Remove the foil in the building only shortly before assembling the transport units.

4.6 Installing the transport units

● Clean the place of installation carefully since particular cleanliness is required for
installation.
● Place the first transport unit as exactly as possible at its final location; place the second
near it so that the units can be oriented before screwing them together.
● Remove the packaging and transport material from the place of installation.
● Remove any contamination originating from transportation since particular cleanliness is
required for installation.
● The dimensions of the cabinet unit(s) and the connections can be found on the project-
specific dimensioned drawing.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 78
Mounting 5
In the following sections it is assumed that the system being installed has still not being
connected to the line supply and is therefore in a no voltage condition.

WARNING
Unprotected installation location
The system must be set up in such a way that risks to individuals are ruled out in the event
of a fault. When using the excitation system outside industrial areas secure against
unauthorized entry using suitable equipment (e.g. guard fences) and attach the appropriate
warning signs.
The marking of the electrical operating area must be made in agreement with the local
safety regulations and national safety guidelines.

WARNING
Untrained personnel
Ensure that only trained personnel have access to the system.

NOTICE
Dirt
Contamination of the system can cause functional faults during operation.
Avoid all work that can cause contamination to the system (e.g. sawing, filing).

Note
Doors hard to move
The cabinet doors must also be readjusted after the cabinets have been set up to ensure
that they open and close easily.

See also
Note for compact systems (Page 70)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 79
Mounting
5.1 Torques for screw connections

5.1 Torques for screw connections

The following table shows the tightening torques for screw connections.

Table 5- 1 Tightening torques for screw connections, strength class 8

Thread Tightening torque

M4 1.8 Nm
M5 5 Nm
M6 8 Nm
M8 20 Nm
M10 40 Nm
M12 70 Nm
M16 155 Nm

Table 5- 2 Torques for busbar screwed joints in accordance with DIN 43673 Part 1, Table 3

Thread Tightening torque

M4 1.5 - 2 Nm
M5 2.5 - 3 Nm
M6 4.5 - 5.5 Nm
M8 10 - 15 Nm
M10 20 - 30 Nm
M12 40 - 60 Nm
M16 80 - 120 Nm

The smaller values apply to greased screws

Table 5- 3 Torques for other screw connections

Tightening torque
Fuses 40 Nm
Plastic covers 6 Nm

5.2 Removing the pallet

Lift the cabinet group using the method described in Chapter Lifting and transportation
(Page 74) and unscrew the pallet.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

80 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Mounting
5.3 Moving the cabinet group on a plane

5.3 Moving the cabinet group on a plane

If a fork lift and crane are not available, the cabinet group can be moved on the base frame
as described in Chapter Lifting and transportation (Page 74).

Note
This is permitted only with the base frame.

5.4 Connection of the cabinet group

The separate transport units must be aligned at their installation location as shown in the
dimensioned drawing and screwed 24 times in uniform separations at appropriate locations
on the cabinet frame using M8 clamping screws, toothed locked washers and nuts, etc. or
using the screw set supplied in the accessories pack.
All screw connections should be made identically.

NOTICE
Reduction in the degree of protection
To ensure the degree of protection for multiple transport units, an adhesive sealing strip
must be attached before the transport units are put together.
This is included in the accessories pack.

5.5 Fastening the cabinet group

On concrete floors
For mounting on concrete floors, the base frame must be fastened as follows.
The representation with earthquake resistance is shown on the left-hand side:

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 81
Mounting
5.5 Fastening the cabinet group

Figure 5-1 Mounting on a concrete floor

For the installation on a concrete base, the following are required for each individual cabinet
(not in the scope of delivery):
● 4x M12 safety dowels, LIEBIG Corp.
● 4x hexagonal nuts, EN ISO 4032-M12-8
● 4x washers, EN ISO 7089-12-200HV

On steel sections
For mounting on steel sections, the base frame must be fastened as follows.
The representation with earthquake resistance is shown on the left-hand side:

Figure 5-2 Mounting on steel sections

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

82 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Mounting
5.6 Fan installation (starting converter)

For the installation on steel sections, the following are required for each individual cabinet
(not in the scope of delivery):
● 4x hexagonal screws, EN ISO 4014-M12-X-8.8
● 4x hexagonal nuts, EN ISO 4032-M12-8
● 8x washers, EN ISO 7089-12-200HV

5.6 Fan installation (starting converter)

The fans of the starting converter are normally removed for transport. During the
reinstallation, note the assignment of the connection cable (conductor end marking) in order
to ensure a clockwise phase sequence. To gain access to the connection socket and the
fastening holes, the guard must be removed on both sides.

NOTICE
Mounting position
Ensure the correct mounting position for the installation of the fans.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 83
Mounting
5.6 Fan installation (starting converter)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

84 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Electrical connection 6
The system electrical connections must be made as specified in the project-specific
component connection diagram (interface diagram).

6.1 General
Notes:
● In the interface cabinet module it is better to connect the signal cables before the power
connections.
● If not all connection points are required on the DC connection busbar, the left connection
points must be kept free, i.e. the connection points are assigned from right to left.
● If not all connection points are required on the AC connection busbars, the front
connection points must be kept free, i.e. the connection points are assigned from back to
front.
Because of the compact construction of the excitation system, the screwed joints of the
connection points can be tightened only using an open-end torque wrench. The figure
below shows the AC connection busbars of the excitation system.
The connection of the starting frequency converter is described in the associated operating
instructions.

6.1.1 Screw connections

Tightening torques for the screw connections, see Chapter Torques for screw connections
(Page 80).
The secure fixing and the status of the busbar screwed joints must be checked annually.
See also Chapter Maintenance (Page 187).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 85
6.1.2 Terminal data
The parameters of the terminals to be used are specified in the following table.

Type Tightening torque Cross-section Connection type Stripped length

[Nm] [mm²] [mm]
ST4 - 0.08...4 Tension spring 8...10
STTB 2.5 - 0.08...2.5 Tension spring 10
ST35 - 2.5...35 Tension spring 25
UHSK/S 2000 1.5...1.8 0.5...6 Screw terminals 10
UK 6 N 1.5...1.8 0.2...10 Screw terminals 10
UK16 1.2...1.8 0.5...16 Screw terminals 11
UK35 3.2...3.7 0.75...35 Screw terminals 16
UK5N 0.8...0.9 0.2...4 Screw terminals 8
URTKP/SP 1.5...1.8 0.5...6 Screw terminals 11
USLKG 35N 3.2...3.7 10...35 Screw terminals 16
UTTB 2.5/2P 0.5...0.6 0.14...4 Screw terminals 9
PLC interface - 0.14...2.5 Screw terminals -
SIRIUS interface 0.4 … 0.5 0.5 ... 2.5 Screw terminals -
converters
Wago 859 series - 0.08...2.5 Tension spring 5...6

6.1.3 Base plate penetrations

The cables must be fed through the base plates using appropriate air-tight cable
penetrations.
This requires that the required holes are drilled or punched in the base plates. The base
plates can be removed to do this. When reinstalled, ensure the correct seal (see Chapter
Inspection of the cooling air system (Page 195)) and the appropriate degree of protection of
the delivered cabinet system is provided.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 86
 Electrical connection
6.1 General

Figure 6-1 Example for cable penetrations

6.1.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

EMC-compliant design
The following section provides some basic information and guidelines that will enable you to
comply with the EMC guidelines.

Shield supports
Bare shielded cables as appropriate and attach them in the cabinet using shield connection
terminals. The shield should be connected on both sides for control cables.
Shield buses 3 × 10 mm are provided for the shield connection on the area of the customer
connections. These shield buses can be equipped with shield connection terminals (figure
below) that must be chosen appropriately for the cable diameter, see table.
A cable propping bar is provided for the strain relief. This shield bus must not be used for this
purpose.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 87
Electrical connection
6.1 General

Figure 6-2 Shield connection

Table 6- 1 Shield connection terminals

Cable diameter Tightening torque Shield terminal Phoenix Contact article

number
2-5 mm 0.4 Nm SK 5 3025338
3-8 mm 0.6 Nm SK 8 3025163
3-14 mm 0.8 Nm SK 14 3025176
5-20 mm 0.8 Nm SK 20 3025338
5-28 mm 1 Nm SK 28 3026997
20-35 mm 1.5 Nm SK 35 3026463

Shield connection
● Bare shielded cables as appropriate and attach them in the cabinet using shield
terminals.
● Do not use any shields to conduct electricity. In other words, they must not
simultaneously act as neutral or PE conductor.
● Connect the shields outside the cabinet with a large area, preferably using ground
clamps, terminals or screw connections.
● Avoid extending the shield to the grounding point by means of a wire (pigtail) which
significantly reduces the effectiveness of the shield for high frequencies.
● Attach the shields to a shield bus at the point immediately after the cables enter the
cabinet. The shields must be uninterrupted.

NOTICE
Incorrectly attached shields
Incorrect connection or damaging of the shield can impair the function of the system.
Handle the shield carefully. Ensure that it is correctly connected.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

88 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Electrical connection
6.1 General

① Connecting terminal
② Shielding bus
③ Shield connection terminals
Figure 6-3 Shielding in control cabinet

Cable installation
● Cables that are subject to or sensitive to interference should be laid as far apart from
each other as possible.
● All cables must be laid as close as possible to grounded enclosure parts such as
mounting plates or the cabinet frame. This reduces both radiation of electromagnetic
waves and interference coupling. Use the cable ducts provided in the cabinet.
● Reserve cores for signal and data cables must be grounded at both ends to achieve an
additional shielding effect in the cabinet.
● Shorten long cables or lay them at points that are not sensitive to interference to avoid
additional coupling points.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 89
 ● Do not cross lines and cables, in particular when interference-sensitive and interference-
prone signals are involved. Lay any unavoidable crossings at right-angles.
– Class 1:
unshielded cables for ≤ 60 VDC
unshielded cables for ≤ 25 VAC
shielded analog signal cables
shielded bus and data cables
operator panel interfaces, incremental/absolute encoder lines
– Class 2:
unshielded cables for > 60 VDC and ≤ 240 VDC
unshielded cables for > 25 VAC and ≤ 240 VAC
– Class 3:
unshielded cables for > 240 VAC/VDC and ≤ 1000 VAC/VDC

I/O interfacing
● Create the ground connection to additional control cabinets, system components and
distributed units with the largest possible cross-section or using the connecting pieces
provided, with at least 16 mm2.
● Ground unused cables at one end at least in the control cabinet.
● Select the largest distance between the power and signal cables, and at least 20 cm. The
following applies: The longer the parallel laying, the greater the distance. If the separation
cannot be maintained, you must provide additional shielding measures.
● Avoid unnecessarily long conducting loops.

Filtering cables
● In the switchgear cabinet, filter auxiliary voltages subject to entering or exiting
interference quantities.

Measures for overvoltage limitation

● The exciter coils for contactors and relays in the system must be connected with
overvoltage limiters (e.g. external RC elements or varistors) in order to counter any
interference potentials that occur between modules.
● If external contactors and relays are controlled by the system, they must also be
equipped with surge suppressors.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 90
 Electrical connection
6.2 Cabling

6.1.5 Routing of the bus cable

The following diagrams show how the bus cable should be routed. Directly at the entry of the
bus cable in the control cabinet, the bus cable must be attached to the strain relief bus. The
bus cable shield must be placed directly on the provided shield buses. If option U15
"redundant open- and closed-loop control" is installed, the bus cables should be routed
physically separated, i.e. the two bus cables each laid at the right- and left-side in the control
cabinet.

Figure 6-4 Routing of the bus cable (1)

Figure 6-5 Routing of the bus cable (2)

6.2 Cabling
Attention must be paid to the proper strain relief of the cable.
Project-specific information for the wiring is contained in the circuit manual, in the
dimensioned drawing and in the component connection diagram (interface diagram).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 91
Electrical connection
6.2 Cabling

Safety notes

Power cable

WARNING
Possible consequences of a short-circuit
Improper installation or damaged cables can cause material damage and even personal
injury. The cables must be completely intact and properly installed.
Please ensure that a short-circuit cannot occur on the power cables due to failure of the
insulation caused by improper cable installation.

NOTICE
CW phase sequence
An incorrect phase sequence can cause inadequate cooling and so damage the power
section.
A clockwise phase sequence of the main infeed must be guaranteed.

Control cable (starting converter)

NOTICE
Use the supplied cables
Only use the pre-fabricated cables supplied with the equipment to make the connection
between the SFC power section and the control cabinet.

6.2.1 Wiring the transport units

If the system is delivered as several transport units, the cabinets are connected electrically at
the installation location using plug-in connections.
These plug-in connections are released to prevent transport damage and must be engaged
in the cabinet walls on-site.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

92 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
6.2.1.1 Example: Wiring a THYRIPOL compact system
Plug-in connections are provided for the electrical connection of the two cabinet units,
excitation system and starting frequency converters installed in series (see below). These
plug-in connections are located in the control cubicle and in the neighboring switchgear
cabinet of the starting frequency converter.
For the separate installation of excitation system and starting frequency converters, the
required connections are made via terminals.

Note
During installation of the cabinet groups, pay attention to the plug-in connections.

DRIVE-CLiQ cable
Establish a DRIVE-CLiQ connection from the SINAMICS Control Unit 320-2 PN to the power
stack adapter.
The DRIVE-CLiQ cable is already routed in the starting frequency converter power section to
the provided penetration in the cabinet side panel. The further routing in the control cubicle
of the excitation system is performed on site.
The following figure shows the routing of the DRIVE-CLiQ cable. The penetration is on the
front or rear of the control cubicle depending on the type of the starting frequency converter.

Figure 6-6 DRIVE-CLiQ cable in the control cubicle

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 93
Electrical connection
6.2 Cabling

Plug-in connections

Plug for voltages up to 60 V

① Control cabinet
② Starting converter power section cabinet

Figure 6-7 Plug for voltages up to 60 V

Table 6- 2 Plug assignment

Assignment Description
=MBJ01DE001.CX-X24
Pin Signal name
1 P24V 24 VDC supply voltage
2
3 M24V
4
5 P24V Release of the starting converter power section
6 Signal
7 P24V Protective shutdown of the starting converter power section
8 Signal
9 P24V Damping element fuse is OK (optionally available)
10 Signal
11 - Reserve
12 - Reserve
13 - Reserve
14 - Reserve
15 - Reserve

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

94 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Electrical connection
6.2 Cabling

Plug for voltages above 60 V (battery / 1-phase AC)

① Control cabinet
② Starting converter power section cabinet

Figure 6-8 Plug for voltages above 60 V (1-phase)

Table 6- 3 Plug assignment

Assignment Description
=MBJ01DE001.CX-X22
Pin Signal name
1 L 230 VAC 50 Hz supply voltage
2 N (this voltage can differ depending on the particular country)
3 - Reserve
4 - Reserve
5 L+ 220 VDC battery voltage
6 L- (this voltage can differ depending on the particular country)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 95
Plug for voltages above 60 V (3-phase AC)

① Control cabinet
② Starting converter power section cabinet

Figure 6-9 Plug above 60 V 3-phase

The figures show the 5-pin variants

Table 6- 4 Plug assignment

Assignment Description
=MBJ01DE001.CX-X40
Pin Signal name
1 L1 400 VAC 50 Hz supply voltage
2 L2 (this voltage can differ depending on the particular country)
3 L3

6.2.2 Cable strain-relief bus

For strain-relief, all cables must be clamped mechanically at the cabinet entrance to the
provided C rails. For safety reasons, the power cable should also be clamped below the
cabinet to prevent an overloading of the C rail.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 96
6.3 Grounding
The protective grounding conductor must be connected in accordance with the local safety
regulations.
The protective grounding conductors must be connected to the ground busbar in the AC
interface cabinet of the excitation system using M12 screw connections (see figure below),
where the required torque must be observed (see Chapter Torques for screw connections
(Page 80)).

Figure 6-10 Grounding bar

Excitation systems with rated currents > 5100 A have an additional ground busbar in the DC
interface cabinet in order to connect the required conductor cross-section of the protective
grounding conductor.

NOTICE
Connecting the protective grounding conductor of the starting frequency converter
Before compact units are commissioned, the ground busbar of the excitation system and
the starting frequency converter must be connected using the cables (protection grounding
conductor 2 x 185 mm2). See also Chapter Note for compact systems (Page 70).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 97
Commissioning 7
7.1 Commissioning the hardware

NOTICE
Commissioning must be performed by qualified personnel
Only qualified personnel and maintenance personnel who have received training are
permitted to commission the system.
Siemens does not accept any responsibility for any damage caused by improper operation
and interventions in the system.

Qualified personnel
For the purpose of these basic safety instructions, qualified personnel are persons
("electrically skilled person" in accordance with EN 50110-1 "Operation of electrical
installations") who are familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning and operation
of the product. They must be properly qualified for the tasks with which they are charged, for
example:
● Training and experience of the relevant regulations to evaluate the commissioned work
as well as recognize and prevent electrotechnical and other possible dangers.
● Training or instruction and/or authorization to switch on and off, ground, and mark
electrical circuits and equipment according to the standards of safety technology.
● Trained or instructed according to the latest safety standards regarding the maintenance
and use of the appropriate safety equipment.
● Training in first aid measures.
Certain checks and measurements must be performed before the system is commissioned.
The test steps required to check the excitation system are summarized in the following
sections as a guideline.
The supply voltages can differ from the specified values for specific projects. The actual
values must be taken from the associated project documents and the appropriate circuit
manual.
Note that the system must only ever be commissioned by qualified personnel and
maintenance personnel who have received training.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 99
Commissioning
7.1 Commissioning the hardware

Insulation test
After completion of the installation work and the electrical connection work, an insulation test
of the power circuits (input and output) must be performed with a test voltage of 1000 V DC.
The insulation test must be performed between each of the active conductors and the active
conductors to ground potential (protective ground system). The insulation resistance must
always be ≥ 1 MΩ.

Requirements for the commissioning

● Mounting the THYRIPOL system has been completed.
● All customer connections have been checked.
● Insulation test of the power circuits has been performed.
● Circuit diagrams and component connection diagrams of the system are available.
● The system-specific parameter list is available.
● The THYRIPOL system has been released for commissioning.
● Power can be applied to the system.

WARNING
The power circuits / main circuits of the system must be de-energized
For the following tests/checks, all line-side and motor-side connections of the system must
be switched off or deenergized.
For compact units, no dangerous voltage may be present at the connection terminals of the
starting frequency converter or at the internal output-side starting frequency converter
disconnector when the external starting frequency converter output-side disconnector is
switched on.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

100 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Commissioning
7.1 Commissioning the hardware

7.1.1 Testing the system wiring

After assembly has been completed and before the system is commissioned (connection of
the supply to the power circuits), the system wiring must be checked by an electrically skilled
person with experience in commissioning excitation systems and starting frequency
converters.

NOTICE
Performing the tests correctly and completely
Observe the project-specific requirements of the associated project documentation, the
circuit manual and the component connection diagram.
The complete unit wiring of the excitation system / compact unit must be tested in
accordance with the project-specific project documentation.
Commissioning of the excitation system / compact unit without these tests is not permitted.

7.1.2 High-voltage test

If a high-voltage test is to be performed as part of inspection of the generator or after
maintenance measures on the main circuit of the excitation system, observe the following
details:
The test voltage level is determined by the IEEE 421.3 and IEC60034-1 standards, etc.
The main circuit of the excitation system is permitted to be tested with a maximum of
5400 VAC (50 Hz / 1.2 min.).
Prior to the test, the following components must be disconnected for the tests:
● Insulation monitor (Bender): =MKC01DE100.HI-F61:L1 and =MKC01DE100.HI-F61:L2 (if
option L87 present)
● Insulation monitor upstream device (Bender): =MKC01DE100.HI-T61:+ and
=MKC01DE100.HI-T61:- (if option L88 present)
● AC overvoltage protection: =MKC01DE100.HC-F75, open the line-side disconnecting
switch of the overvoltage protection
● Output voltage decoupling using a fuse-disconnector
Prior to the test, the following components must also be disconnected for tests above
4200 VAC:
● Voltage acquisition, channel 1: =MKC01DE100.HC-T10:X45
● Voltage acquisition, channel 2: =MKC01DE100.HC-T20:X45 (if option U15 present)
● Disconnect fan transformers using =MKC01DE100.HC-F01, =MKC01DE100.HC-F02,
=MKC01DE100.HC-F03, =MKC01DE100.HC-F04, =MKC01DE100.HC-F05,
=MKC01DE100.HC-F06 (disconnecting switches =MKC01DE100.HC-F03 to
=MKC01DE100.HC-F06 may not be present in some plants)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 101
Commissioning
7.1 Commissioning the hardware

Ensure that all remaining devices connected to the main circuit tolerate the applied test
voltage.

NOTICE
Repeat test
The value of the high-voltage test performed at the factory can be found in the routine test
report. Repeat tests should be performed with maximum 80% of the voltage.

7.1.3 Test of the DC de-excitation switch

Optional version of the THYRIPOL static excitation system with a DC-side deexcitation
switch (field switch)

Note
The arcing chambers of the switch poles of the deexcitation switch are removed for
transportation of the excitation system.

The following work must be performed on the deexcitation switch before the excitation
system is commissioned:
● Mounting the arcing chambers of the switch poles supplied (placing on top and retention
of the arching chambers on the switch poles), see plant-specific customer documentation
● Visual inspection of the deexcitation switch
● Function test of the deexcitation switch
– Closing and opening the deexcitation switch at the operator panel;
– Checking the feedback signals for the switch positions CLOSED and OPEN at the
operator panel;
– Hardware checking of the feedback signals of the control circuits for the switch
positions CLOSED and OPEN according to the circuit manual;

7.1.4 Connecting and checking the power supplies

Note
The standard values for voltage and frequency for the connection of the power supplies are
specified in the following section. These values can differ for specific systems. The actual
values for the voltage and the frequency can be obtained from the type plate of the control
cubicle.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

102 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Commissioning
7.1 Commissioning the hardware

Table 7- 1 Connecting the power supplies

Connection, check Circuit manual reference

Battery voltage
Connection of battery infeed 1 (220 VDC) =CJN01GW001.BC1
Check and measure the voltage at the excitation system / compact unit
Connection of battery infeed 2 (220 VDC) =CJN01GW001.BC1
Check and measure the voltage at the excitation system / compact unit
Control cubicle auxiliary voltage
Connection of the 1-phase AC infeed (1-phase 230 VAC / 50 Hz) =CJN01GW001.BG1
Check and measure the voltages at the excitation system / compact unit
Interface cabinet auxiliary voltage
Note: This auxiliary infeed is available for individual excitation system only when one of the following options is installed:
C03, K52, L95-L99
Connection of the 3-phase AC infeed (3-phase 400 VAC / 50 Hz) =CJN01GW001.BG2
Check and measure the voltages at the excitation system / compact unit
Check/measure the rotating field at the excitation system / compact unit (clock-
wise rotating field)

If the voltage values of the specified power supplies are correct, the miniature circuit
breakers for the battery and auxiliary voltages can be connected, see the following table:

Table 7- 2 Connecting the miniature circuit breakers

Miniature circuit breaker Infeed / power supply Circuit manual reference

Battery voltage
.BC-F18 Battery infeed 1 =CJN01GW001.BC1
.BC-F28 Battery infeed 2 =CJN01GW001.BC1
.BC-F10 Power supply unit 1 =CJN01GW001.BC2
.BC-F20 Power supply unit 2 =CJN01GW001.BC2
.BC-F30 External signal voltage =CJN01GW001.BC2
.BC-F40 Starting frequency converter =CJN01GW001.BC2
1-phase AC auxiliary infeed
.BG-F62 1-phase AC infeed =CJN01GW001.BG1
3-phase AC auxiliary infeed
.BG-F11 3-phase AC voltage monitoring =CJN01GW001.BG2
.BG-F01 3-phase AC infeed =CJN01GW001.BG2
.BG-F02 3-phase AC excitation system =CJN01GW001.BG2
.BG-F03 3-phase AC starting frequency con- =CJN01GW001.BG2
verter

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 103
7.1.5 Switch on and check the open- and closed-loop components
After the connection of the battery and auxiliary voltages, the open- and closed-loop
components can be started.
To do this, switch on the miniature circuit-breaker in accordance with the following table.

Table 7- 3 Switch on of the miniature circuit-breakers

Miniature circuit-breaker Component / power supply Circuit manual reference

Channel 1
.BE-F10 S7-300 =CJN01GW001.BE3
.BE-F14 SINAMICS DCM Control Module =CJN01GW001.BE5
.BE-F15 Supply: =CJN01GW001.BE10
Power unit
Connection cabinet
.BE-F16 Supply: =CJN01GW001.BE13
Additional cabinet modules
.BE-F17 ET200 pilot voltage =CJN01GW001.BE6
.BE-F18 External pilot voltage =CJN01GW001.BE9
Channel 2
.BE-F20 S7-300 =CJN01GW001.BE3
.BE-F24 SINAMICS DCM Control Module =CJN01GW001.BE5
.BE-F25 Supply: =CJN01GW001.BE10
Power unit
Connection cabinet
.BE-F26 Supply: =CJN01GW001.BE13
Additional cabinet modules
.BE-F27 ET200 pilot voltage =CJN01GW001.BE6
.BE-F28 External pilot voltage =CJN01GW001.BE9
General
.BE-F30 Operator control device =CJN01GW001.BE3
.BE-F35 Connection cabinet =CJN01GW001.BE10
.BE-F36 Additional cabinet modules =CJN01GW001.BE13
.BE-F37 Pilot voltage, supply =CJN01GW001.BE6
.BE-F38 External pilot voltage =CJN01GW001.BE9

Testing and commissioning the software, see Chapters Software installation (Page 107) and
Commissioning the software (Page 105).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 104
 Commissioning
7.2 Commissioning the software

7.2 Commissioning the software

7.2.1 Switch on
After the switch on and test of the open- and closed-loop control components, the software
on the associated components starts.

7.2.2 Check messages

Different startup times produce messages in the components (messages, alarms, faults).
Acknowledge the messages after the switch on, see Chapter Operation (Page 113). If, after
the startup of all components and their acknowledgment, other messages are active, rectify
the causes of these messages as specified in Chapter Alarm, error and system messages
(Page 186).
THYRIPOL excitation systems / compact units are preconfigured and parameterized in the
factory in line with the plant-specific data. Messages that cannot be acknowledged can
indicate that a fault occurred during the hardware or software commissioning.
Messages that can have as cause a fault in the hardware commissioning must be checked in
accordance with Chapter Commissioning (Page 99).

7.2.3 System configuration

The control cabinet is configured in the SIMEA factory before it is shipped according to the
associated system data. The configuration is considered to be the availability of options
according to the option and function list for the customer-specific system, see Chapter.
Options and functions.
Configurations cannot be activated outside the factory (for example the activation of the
power system stabilizer, Q control, cos phi control, …).

7.2.4 System parameterization

The THYRIPOL excitation system / compact unit is parameterized in the factory prior to
delivery in line with the plant-specific data. The system parameterization is defined as being
the system-specific parameterization of the system functions. The system parameterization
includes, for example:
● Parameterization of the nominal quantities, such as generator voltage and generator
current
● Parameterization of the controller quantities, such as gain factor and reset times
The commissioning engineer must check the parameterization and perform any optimization
or customization to the system-specific requirements of the system.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 105
Commissioning
7.2 Commissioning the software

7.2.5 Function diagram references

Function diagram references THYRIPOL open-loop control to THYRIPOL closed-loop

control
In the function diagrams of the THYRIPOL open-loop control, the references to functions of
the THYRIPOL closed-loop control are to be found in the following form.
EXC_xxxx
xxxx describes the unique function diagram number of the THYRIPOL closed-loop control.
The example of the signal "Generator on grid" is shown below. The signal is read in at a
digital input of an ET200 module of the S7 (reference PAB – patch bar) and is used, on the
one hand, in the THYRIPOL open-loop control but is also passed on to the THYRIPOL
closed-loop control, as reference EXC_5822 in parameter r31002.5 shows.

Signals from the THYRIPOL open-loop control are passed to the THYRIPOL closed-loop
control via control words. The function diagrams FP5820 onwards of the THYRIPOL closed-
loop control show these control words. In the example of the signal "Generator on grid," this
signal is passed from the PLC parameter (PLC1.)31002.5 to the THYRIPOL closed-loop
control and made available to the interconnection parameters (EXC2.) 57953 for further use.
The further signal curve can be traced with function diagram 5836.

Function diagram references THYRIPOL closed-loop control to THYRIPOL open-loop

control
In the function diagrams of the THYRIPOL closed-loop control, the references to functions of
the THYRIPOL open-loop control are to be found in function diagram FP5810 and the
following function diagrams. These function diagrams show the THYRIPOL closed-loop
control status words and the parameter numbers of the signals that are passed on.

The example of the "rotor temperature monitoring" function is shown below. The function is
described in the function diagrams of the THYRIPOL closed-loop control 8007. The signals
(EXC2.)54615 "Rotor Temp," (EXC2.)54612.0 "Rotor Temp Wrn," and (EXC2.)54612.1
"Rotor Temp Fault" are passed to function diagrams 5811 and 5813.

The signals are passed to the THYRIPOL closed-loop control in status words ZSW2 and
ZSW7. The reference in the last column is used to trace the signal in the THYRIPOL open-
loop control.

In the parameter description of the THYRIPOL open-loop control, it is then possible to go to

the corresponding function diagram page via the parameter description.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

106 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Commissioning
7.3 Software installation

7.2.6 Software
After assembly has been completed and before the system is commissioned (connection of
the supply to the power circuits), the tests described in this chapter must be performed by an
electrically skilled person with experience in commissioning excitation systems and starting
frequency converters.
● Test the binary and analog signals via PROFIBUS from the static excitation system /
compact unit to the instrumentation and control.
● Test the binary and analog signals via PROFIBUS from the instrumentation and control to
the static excitation system / compact unit.
● Parameterization and test of signals and limitations.
The installation and the commissioning of the software are described in Chapters Software
installation (Page 107) and Commissioning the software (Page 105).

7.3 Software installation

Note
Only authorized personnel may make changes to the software.
You can obtain the released software from your local Siemens sales partner.
Non-authorized changes to the software void the warranty.

The THYRIPOL excitation system / compact unit consists of the following software
components:
● Display and operator panel
● S7-PLC open-loop control
● CUD/BCU closed-loop control
● SINAMICS Control Unit 320-2 (variant for THYRIPOL compact units)
This specific software package and its installation are described in the following sections.
The current version of the software can be determined via the display and operator panel.

7.3.1 Display and operator panel installation

The display and operator panel is equipped with a Microsoft Windows operating system and
a special driver configuration especially for the THYRIPOL excitation system / compact unit.
The application is available for installation as ZIP archive. The installation must be performed
as follows:
1. Copy the installation file to drive D.
2. If an application has already been installed, remove it or rename the existing directory
D:\THYRIPOL – e.g. THYRIPOL_OLD_YYYYMMDD.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 107
Commissioning
7.3 Software installation

3. Unzip the application on drive D:\ into the THYRIPOL directory.

Directory structure of the application:

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

108 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Commissioning
7.3 Software installation

4. To allow the application to be started automatically, a link to the

D:\THYRIPOL\StartSecpApp.bat script must be made in the C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Start Menu\Programs\Startup directory.

5. Restart the display and operator panel.

6. The application starts after the restart.
The application is customized system-specific to the customer system prior to delivery from
the factory. After the completed commissioning, a backup of the installed application to a
separate storage medium (e.g. USB drive) is recommended.

7.3.1.1 Update of the display and operator panel software

An update of the application on the display and operator panel is performed as for the
installation of the application.
The system parameterization must be loaded in accordance with Chapter Operation
(Page 113).

7.3.1.2 Installation of the software after replacement of the display and operator panel
Failure of the display and operator panel has no effect on running operation of the
THYRIPOL excitation system / compact unit.
If a replacement device is available, the defective hardware can be replaced as specified in
the supplied installation instructions.
A backup of the application must be loaded as specified in Chapter Display and operator
panel installation (Page 107). After the application has been started, it is once again
available for operating and monitoring the THYRIPOL excitation system / compact unit.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 109
Commissioning
7.3 Software installation

7.3.2 SIMATIC S7 installation

The installation of the S7 software requires a Siemens programming device with Siemens
SIMATIC Manager software and an Ethernet interface. The required SIMATIC software
components and versions are specified in the system-specific documentation. The
connection and the installation of the software must be performed as follows:
1. Check the power supply of the S7 unit.
2. Establish a connection between the Siemens programming device and the PROFINET
bus using a free port on one of the SCALANCE units.
3. Check the availability of the S7 PLC using the Siemens programming device.
4. Load the hardware configuration for channel 1 and channel 2.
5. Load the NetPRO configuration for channel 1 and channel 2.
6. Load the software modules for channel 1 and channel 2.
7. Load the system parameterization as specified in Chapter Operation (Page 113).
8. Use the display and operator panel to acknowledge any errors that result from installing
the software.

After the completed commissioning, a backup of the installed S7 software is recommended.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

110 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Commissioning
7.3 Software installation

7.3.2.1 Update the SIMATIC S7 software

If a new version of the S7 software is available, it must be installed in accordance with
SIMATIC S7 installation (Page 110).
The system parameterization must be loaded in accordance with Chapter Operation
(Page 113).

7.3.3 CUD/BCU installation

SINAMICS MMCs are required for the installation of the CUD/BCU software. The software
for the CUD/BCU must be stored on the MMCs. The CUD/BCU software is available as ZIP
archive. The installation must be performed as follows:
1. Unpack the archive file to a temporary directory on a Microsoft Windows computer.
2. Copy the content of the directory to an empty SINAMICS MMC.
3. Switch off the power supply to the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE.
4. Remove the cover of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE.
5. Insert the SINAMICS MMC in the MMC slot.
6. Switch on the power supply to the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE.
7. The firmware update is performed. The update has been completed if the RDY-LED and
the DP1-LED flash at 0.5 Hz (the update takes about 12 minutes).
8. Switch off and on the power supply to the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE. The
SINAMICS MMC can remain inserted.
9. Wait until the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE has started.
10.Load the system parameterization as specified in Chapter Operation (Page 113).
11.Use the operator panel to acknowledge any faults resulting from the replacement.

7.3.3.1 Update the CUD/BCU software

Update the CUD/BCU software as specified in Chapter CUD/BCU installation (Page 111).
The parameterization of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE is retained. A backup of
the current system parameterization is still recommended.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 111
Commissioning
7.3 Software installation

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

112 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Operation 8
8.1 Operation, fundamentals
The display and operator panel is based on a SIMATIC Panel PC and, depending on the
authorization levels, permits the monitoring, operation and commissioning of the THYRIPOL
excitation system / compact unit.
The display and operator panel is not required for the normal operation of the excitation
system / compact unit. A failure of the display and operator panel does not impair the
operation of the system.
Using the display and operator panel, it is possible to access all required components of the
static excitation system / compact unit via the parameter system. This enables plant-specific
parameterization of the THYRIPOL static excitation system / compact unit.

8.1.1 Components
The software modules for controlling the THYRIPOL excitation system / compact unit
functions are implemented in the following hardware components of the system:
● Display and operator panel
● SIMATIC S7 PLC and ET200S peripheral modules
● SINAMICS DCM Control Module (variant for THYRIPOL excitation system / compact unit)
● SINAMICS CU320-2 (variant for the THYRIPOL compact unit)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 113
Operation
8.1 Operation, fundamentals

8.1.2 Storage media

The following storage media are used:
● USB medium on the display and operator panel
The display and operator panel is based on a computer of the x86/ia64 family (with the
MS Windows operating system). Standard USB media can be used to copy data. The
function of the USB medium depends on the Microsoft specifications for Windows
operating systems; there are no restrictions for the application.

NOTICE
Virus scanning
Ensure that the deployed USB medium is virus-free.
Perform a virus scan using a virus scanner with up-to-date virus patterns.
Viruses can cause failure of the display and operator panel. Operation, monitoring and
diagnostics of the THYRIPOL components is then no longer possible.

● SIMATIC MMCs
For the fail-safe storage of code and data, SIMATIC MMCs are inserted in the SIMATIC
PLC.
The correct operation of the THYRIPOL system is guaranteed only with the cards
inserted. The cards must not be replaced or removed during operation.
● SINAMICS MMCs
The SINAMICS MMCs are deployed in the SINAMICS DCM Control Module for the
software updating of the CUD and the BCU, and for saving diagnostic data.
The operation of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module is possible even without MMCs.
However, to use the diagnostic capabilities, the MMCs should always be inserted.

See also
Deployed components (Page 293)
● SINAMICS CF cards (in the starting frequency converter)
The SINAMICS CU320-2 PN module is used in THYRIPOL compact units.
For how to handle the CF card used, see the documentation for the SINAMICS CU320-2
PN.
Link in Chapter Deployed components (Page 293).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

114 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
8.2 Access levels

Keyswitch
The keyswitch is mounted in the door of the control cubicle below the display and operator
panel.
The positions of the keyswitch are LOCAL and REMOTE.
● REMOTE
Normal operation. The THYRIPOL system is operated from the higher-level
instrumentation and control.
● LOCAL
Permits local operation.
Switch position for commissioning and for fault diagnosis.

The keyswitch is monitored for:

● Uniqueness of the switch position, wire breakage and short-circuit of the supply cables.
In the event of a fault, the system reports "Keyswitch fault, no position message".
Additional group message to the instrumentation and control. In this particular fault
situation, the excitation system selects the REMOTE operating mode.
● Proper switching between the switch positions.
If a mechanical defect (e.g. adhesion) causes the switching action to take too long, the
switch position will be signaled as "undefined". The monitoring time can be
parameterized. As default, 1 second is set. In this particular fault situation, the excitation
system selects the REMOTE operating mode.

Response for a fault message from the keyswitch:

● When the excitation system is ON:
In this particular fault situation, the excitation system selects the REMOTE operating
mode. The current operating mode is retained.
● When the excitation system is OFF:
Local operation is no longer possible.
The fault messages can be acknowledged on the display and operator panel.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 115
REMOTE keyswitch position
The THYRIPOL SES is controlled from the higher-level instrumentation and control.
The "Excitation OFF" command from the instrumentation and control is accepted only when
the "Generator in no-load state" condition is satisfied, i.e. the system is not connected to the
supply system AND "not in auxiliaries service".
Functions of the display and operator panel
● Display of the actual values and measured values
The values can be selected from a list using menu buttons, and are continually updated.
● Display of messages
● Various service functions

LOCAL SES keyswitch position

The THYRIPOL SES can be operated locally. Operation from the instrumentation and control
is not possible.
Possible operating functions from the display and operator panel in this mode:
● Local preselection of the control system operating modes or the associated setpoints.
● Switching THYRIPOL SES on and off.
● Operate the system from the service menu for commissioning and service purposes.
See Chapter AUTOHOTSPOT

Access authorization
The access authorization to the various service functions is controlled by two access levels:
● User mode
The user mode is selected during normal operation and, depending on the keyswitch
position, permits monitoring (REMOTE) or operation (LOCAL) via the display and
operator panel.
● Commissioning mode
The commissioning mode is password-protected and permits access to the service and
commissioning functions.
The password is 521346 and cannot be changed.
The system parameters can be changed in commissioning mode. Some parameters of
the SINAMICS components (EXC1, EXC2) have an additional authorization level. This
can be changed using parameter EXC1.3. The required access level for the parameters
is listed in the list manuals.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 116
 Operation
8.2 Access levels

Overview of the access possibilities in the two access levels:

For the description of the screens, see Chapter User interface of the display and operator
panel (Page 118)

Table 8- 1 Access right

Screen form Explanation Operating mode Commissioning mode

Start - r r
- Back-to-back Start Extension in the start screen r r
- Electrical braking for HPP Extension in the start screen r r
- Cable startup Extension in the start screen r r
Values - w w
Analog - r r
Q/cos phi - w w
- BAR Extension in the Q/cos phi r r
screen
P-Q - r r
Trend - w w
Messages - r r
Service See the following entries - -
Languages - w w
Service submenu:
Management - r w
Software versions - r r
Fan operating hours - w w
Trace - w w
Fault recorder - r w
Parameter - - -
- Wizard - x w
- Expert lists - x w
- Parameter data set manage- - x w
ment
- Export/import of parameter x w
data sets

r = read
w = write
x = exclude

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 117
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel
The display and operator panel has a graphic, fully intuitive operable user interface that
supports all required operating, diagnostic and display functions.
After applying the power supply, the display and operator panel starts automatically in full-
screen mode.
Temporary interactive windows for the following functions are also displayed:
● Help texts
● Select configuration
● Parameterization
● Confirmation of the inputs
● Virtual keyboard

8.3.1 Structure of the user interface

The screens of the user interface described below have the following structure:
● Title bar
● Status field
● Operator panel
● Menu
● Task-specific dialog field in the screen center

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 118
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-1 Structure of the user interface

8.3.1.1 Title bar

The header bar contains:
● Product name THYRIPOL
● Screen header
Depends on the currently selected menu.
● Date and time
The current values come via the controller of the higher-level instrumentation and control.

8.3.1.2 Status field

The status field shows pending alarms and faults, and differentiates between the following
representations:
● Fault: Exclamation mark in the red field
● Alarm: Exclamation mark on a yellow triangle
In addition, a dedicated button can be used to confirm and reset pending faults and alarms
that need to be acknowledged.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 119
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

The lower area of the status field contains the following information:

Table 8- 2 Status field

Text Meaning/function
LOCAL The system can be locally operated.
REMOTE The system is controlled from the instrumentation and control.
Safety OFF The Safety OFF (external) signal is active.
No Safety OFF The Safety OFF (external) signal is inactive.
Group message A group message is active and has been transferred to the instru-
mentation and control.
No group message No group message active.
On the supply system The generator is connected to the supply system.
Not on the supply system The generator is disconnected from the supply system.
n ≤ 90% The generator speed is less than 90% of the rated speed.
n > 90% The generator has reached 90 % of the rated speed.
Starting frequency converter ON The starting frequency converter is switched on.
Starting frequency converter The starting frequency converter is switched off.
OFF
Redundant System redundancy is effective (both control channels are availa-
ble)
Non-redundant System redundancy is not effective (one control channel is not
available).
Lim. active A limitation function acts.
No lim. active No limitation function acts.
Ready for switching on The excitation is ready to switch on.
Not ready for switching on The excitation is not ready to switch on.
Unlocked mode The system is in unlocked operation.
Test operation The system is in test operation.

8.3.1.3 Operator panel

The operator panel on the right-hand edge of the display and operator panel user interface
permits in the LOCAL key-operated switch position the operation of the exciter system on the
system.
For example, this means that it is possible to switch-on and switch-off the excitation system
or inhibit or manually switch over the channel locally.
The commands and operating elements are always processed in the active control channel.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

120 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

The following operation and status elements are available:

Table 8- 3 Operator panel

Text Meaning/function
Excitation ON/OFF This group element indicates the excitation state. Green is ON. A
button is available to SWITCH ON/SWITCH OFF.
AUTO/MANUAL control mode This group element indicates the state of the voltage controller.
Green is AVR (automatic mode, "AVR"), white is ECR
(current controller mode, "ECR").
A button is available to switch over to auto AVR or to
switch over to manual ECR.
Active channel This group element indicates the channel state (active/inactive).
The active channel number is displayed in the green field.
A button is available to switch over the channels.
Channel switching lock This group element indicates the state of the channel switching
lock. Red means no channel switching possible.
White means that channel switching is possible.
A button permits the activation of the channel switching lock, irre-
spective of the fault state of the system.
A channel switching lock can be activated manually or results from
a fault. The channel switching lock can be deactivated only when it
was activated manually (a faulty channel cannot be enabled by
switching OFF the channel switching lock).
This group element indicates the state of the
PSS ON/OFF power system stabilizer. Green is ON, white is OFF.
(optionally available) A button is available to SWITCH ON/SWITCH OFF.
Q controller ON/OFF This group element indicates the state of the reactive power con-
(optionally available) troller. Green is ON, white is OFF.
A button is available to SWITCH ON/SWITCH OFF.
cos phi controller ON/OFF This group element indicates the state of the cos phi controller.
(optionally available) Green is ON, white is OFF.
A button is available to SWITCH ON/SWITCH OFF.

PDG, Q controller and cos phi controller are available as an option (the status / switching
group is missing if an option is not ordered/configured).
The associated logic runs on the S7 controller; the user interface displays the values and
states transferred from the S7 controller. The availability of the switching capabilities is
formed in the S7 controller and so depends on the system status.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 121
8.3.1.4 Menu
The menu bar in the lower area of the user interface permits the selection of the display and
operator panel screens.
The menu bar normally consists of just one line. It is divided into a second level when the
"Service" menu item is selected.
The menu fields of the main level are always available and are emphasized by being
represented three-dimensional. One menu item is always active for each level. The selected
menu is represented as a pressed button (three-dimensional, sunken).
Only the currently available menu fields are displayed.

8.3.1.5 Screen
The screens appropriate for the menu selection are represented in the dialog field in the
screen center.
The screens are described in detail in the following sections.

For screen forms with a large amount of information, the screen form field can be extended
to the left and right to make it easier to read the data. The extension of the screen form field
can be activated and deactivated using the two arrow keys at the upper end of the status bar
or toolbar. The status field and the operator panel are then represented compressed.
Example:

Figure 8-2 Screen without and with compression of the status field and the operator panel

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 122
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-3 Screen field 2

8.3.2 Screens

8.3.2.1 Start
The system configuration is represented symbolically on the start screen, and the base
actual values of the system and the current operating mode are displayed.
These base actual values are:
● Generator voltage
● Field current
● Active power
● Reactive power

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 123
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-4 Start screen (symbol screen)

8.3.2.2 Values
The Values screen can be used to specify setpoints for the generator voltage and the field
current.
To specify a setpoint for the generator voltage, the following conditions must be met:
● Local operation is activated (LOCAL operating mode).
● The excitation is switched on.
● The controller is in the automatic mode (auto AVR).
● The Q or cos phi controller is deactivated.
To specify a setpoint for the field current, the following conditions must be met:
● Local operation is activated (LOCAL operating mode).
● The excitation is switched on.
● The controller is in manual mode (manual ECR).
The control logic is integrated in the open- and closed-loop control channels. Only the
visualization and operation is implemented in the display and operator panel.
The setpoint can be specified as direct value input or by clicking the up/down buttons. If an
up/down button is pressed permanently, the setpoint will be changed continually. The step
size of the setpoint change does not depend on the activation duration.
The setpoint limits are parameterized in the voltage controller, transferred by PROFINET to
the operator panel and checked for validity during the setpoint change. The specified
setpoint, the setpoint feedback from the setpoint generator and the actual value for each
open- and closed-loop control channel are each displayed for the voltage controller and the
current controller.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

124 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

The current values for the four freely-selected quantities are displayed below. Click the
"Configuration" button to make the selection. A temporary selection window opens and
makes available a signal selection.

Figure 8-5 Values screen with percentage value representation and open selection window

The values in the Values screen (displays and inputs) are always represented as absolute
values or percentage values. The display mode can be switched over
For the two-channel variant, the states of the two channels are shown next to each other.
The active or inactive channel has a green or white background, respectively. A setpoint can
be specified only in the active channel; the inactive channel is corrected. Fields for which no
entry is possible are grayed out.
Example in the following figure:
● Channel 1 is active.
● Channel 2 is inactive.
● The exciter system is in Auto mode (setpoints can be specified for the generator voltage).
● Setpoint specifications for the field current are inactive.
● Excitation is ON

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 125
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-6 Values screen with absolute value representation

8.3.2.3 Analog values

In the Analog value screen form, it is possible to display six analog values (for a two-channel
version, for each channel) in the form of pointer instruments.
Representation of controller quantities:
The scale of the pointer instrument is colored blue up to the current setpoint; the red pointer
indicates the current measured value.

Figure 8-7 Analog values representation screen

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

126 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

The generator voltage and the field current can be represented as follows:
● Absolute value display for setpoint and actual value in a common pointer instrument.
● Normalized representation of the setpoint (no actual value).
Setpoints are not displayed for controller options that have not been ordered (e.g. cos phi,
Q).
The current values are also shown as number with the appropriate physical unit in the
analog pointer instrument. For the two-channel variant, the channel states are shown in the
upper area of the screen and the pointer instruments arranged next to each other for both
channels.
The following signals can be represented as analog values:
● Controlled variables
– Generator voltage
– Field current
– Reactive power (optional)
– cos phi (optional)
● Measured quantities
– Generator voltage
– Generator current
– Field voltage
– Field current
– Active power
– Reactive power
– Frequency
– Supply voltage
– Rotor temperature
– Cold gas temperature
Click the "Configuration" button to make the selection. A temporary selection window opens
and makes available a signal selection.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 127
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-8 Analog values screen with opened selection window

8.3.2.4 Reactive power control / power factor control

For the two-channel variant, the states of the two channels are shown next to each other in
the upper area of the screen. The active or inactive channel has a green or white
background, respectively. A setpoint can be specified only in the active channel; the inactive
channel is corrected.
Depending on the particular version, the reactive power controller and the cos phi controller
are displayed in the center area. These two controllers are locked mutually so that either the
reactive power controller or the cos phi controller can be activated at any one time.
If the reactive power controller is active, setpoints can be specified for the reactive power as
discrete values or with up/down buttons. The continuous pressing of Up/Down causes the
continuous change of the setpoint.
If the cos phi control is active, then setpoints can be entered for cos phi using the arrow keys
(inductive, capacitive) – or also as discrete setpoint inputs. The continuous pressing of the
arrow keys causes the continuous change of the setpoint.
The following is displayed in the lower area of the screen:
● The current values for the four freely-selected quantities
A temporary selection window allows the selection from the signals provided cyclically to
the user interface.
or
● Information for the reactive power compensatory control (option)
Switching between these two subviews is possible.
If several machine sets exist, a reactive power compensation control (BAR) is available. This
provides a uniform reactive power for up to six machine sets. This function can only be
activated and deactivated via commands from the instrumentation and control.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

128 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

The reactive power compensatory control, switched on or off by the instrumentation and
control, is displayed in this screen as well as the reactive power (as percentage and MVAr)
for up to six units.
If this option was ordered order-specific, this screen can be selected from the menu bar of
the user interface.
The upper area of the subscreen shows the current BAR operating states:
● BAR is ON/OFF
● BAR is ACTIVE/INACTIVE
● Setpoint of the total reactive power of the generators as percentage and MVAr
● Actual value of the total reactive power of the generators as percentage and MVAr
The lower area of the subscreen shows the actual values of the reactive powers as
percentage and MVAr for a maximum of six machine sets.

Example 1:
Screen form for two channel version with reactive power controller and cos phi controller with
absolute value displays:

Figure 8-9 Reactive power compensation control / power factor control with absolute value
representation screen

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 129
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-10 Reactive power compensation control / power factor control with percentage value
representation screen and opened selection window

Example 2:
Screen for the two-channel version with reactive power controller, cos phi controller and
measured value display with percentage value display:

Figure 8-11 Reactive power compensation control / power factor control screen

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

130 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

8.3.2.5 P-Q power diagram

The user interface for the power diagram is represented in two dimensions with the active
power and reactive power. The power diagram and the scaling of the axes are system-
specific and are imported from the configuration files during the system startup. The power
diagram is a static representation.
The operating point is shown as a blue dot. The last minute of the operating point is
represented as follow-up to the current operating point.
The assignment of the P and Q quantities to the diagram axes can be configured with a
softkey.

Figure 8-12 Power diagram

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 131
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

8.3.2.6 Trends
The trend display for representing the trends of the analog values and binary signals permits
the recording and display of eight signals per channel. A list of the signals available for
selection is contained in the appendix, Chapter Signals for representation and recording
(Page 297).

Figure 8-13 Trends screen display

The "Configuration" button allows the selection of the signals to be recorded. A temporary
window with two lists opens. The "Available signals" list offers a selection of the available
signals. The arrow keys can be used navigate in the list. Click a signal name to select the
desired signal that can be selected for a trend recording by clicking the selection button. The
signal name is then displayed in the second "Trend Values" list. The signal is deselected
again and disappears from this list by clicking on a signal name in the "Trend Values" list.
The configuration can be accepted or rejected using the "OK" or "Cancel" button.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

132 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-14 Signal selection for the trend recording

The recording starts immediately after a trend configuration has been accepted. This
appears immediately in the display and operator panel as the signal trend.
Various functions for the trend display allow the better analysis of the events. The symbols of
the functions and a short description are listed below.
The selection of the currently active signal adapts the vertical axis appropriately for the
signal size.

Figure 8-15 Signal selection for the trend representation

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 133
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Trend recording is made in two steps:

● The long-term trend is recorded in 1 second intervals since the last trend configuration
and a maximum over the last 53 weeks.
● The short-term trend is recorded in 10 ms intervals since the last trend configuration and
a maximum over the last 24 hours.
The trend data is archived as a ring buffer. The oldest data are overwritten when the ring
buffer is full.
The trend recording is subdivided into intervals that are limited with respect to time. As a
consequence, file sizes are kept low, and the potential data loss is limited if the power supply
for the display and operator panel fails. The display and operator panel creates 1 file per
calendar week for the long-term trend recording over one year. Consequently, as many as
53 files of the long-term recording are available after one year of trend recording. For the
short-term recording, the display and operator panel creates one file per elapsed hour,
where the last 24 hours are recorded.
The "Trend recording" button opens archived recordings in the trend display for analysis
purposes. The trend archive can be selected after selecting the recording stage (long/short
term recording). The trend archives are listed chronologically. The navigation keys can be
used to navigate in the list. Click the desired trend archive to represent it in the trend display.
Using the channel selection, it is possible to display the signals in the following versions:
● Channel 1
● Channel 2
● Both channels
● Active channel
● Inactive/redundant channel

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

134 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Figure 8-16 Channel selection

The recorded archives can be exported on a USB storage medium. Click the button for the
CSV export to open a Microsoft Windows dialog window for selecting the storage location.
Provided a USB storage medium has been inserted, it will be made available in the drive
selection.
The "Open exported archives" button allows the selection of exported trend archives from
the file system using a Microsoft Windows dialog window and to represent them in the trend
display.

8.3.2.7 Messages
The Messages screen shows the chronological history of maximum 1000 messages.
Each message entry contains a time stamp, the message type, the message status
(arrived/sent/acknowledged) and the message text.

Navigation buttons:

Page start Up one row Page up

Page end Down one row Page down

Click the Help button to display additional information for the selected message.
This information contains details about the associated message, in many cases notes for a
possible fault correction, as well as further information about the circuit manual or the
function diagram.
A detailed description for the message concept is provided in Chapter Alarm, error and
system messages (Page 186).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 135
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Fault messages can be acknowledged by clicking the Quit button in the status bar.
In the commissioning mode, this message buffer can be cleared using a button visible only in
this authorization level.
The message archive can be exported on a USB storage medium. Click the button for the
CSV export to open a Microsoft Windows dialog window for selecting the storage location.
Provided a USB storage medium has been inserted, it will be made available in the drive
selection.

Status C Come – message arrived

L Gone – message gone
Q Acknowledged – message acknowledged
Color identification of the Red Fault notifications
messages Yellow Alarm messages
Green Operating messages
Figure 8-17 Messages screen example

8.3.2.8 Starting converter

This screen is available only for compact systems.
All significant data, operating states and messages are displayed for the starting converter
operation.

Note
Display only
This is only a display. The starting converter cannot be controlled from this user interface.

The screen opens by selecting the Starting converter menu item in the menu bar.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

136 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-18 Starting converter screen example

8.3.2.9 Service
The general menu bar in the Service main menu item can be used to display another level of
the submenu as a second line.
Detailed description, see Chapter Screens under the Service menu (Page 138).

Figure 8-19 Service menu

8.3.2.10 Languages
This button (at the far right in the menu) is available in all screen forms and their subitems.
The language can be selected in this menu. The available languages depend on the system
configuration. All contents (including messages, help text and parameter names) are shown
in the selected language in the screens. The language change is possible in all authorization
levels by continuing in the group. The language change acts immediately and can also be
performed for activated excitation without any effect on the operation.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 137
8.3.3 Screens under the Service menu
The following sections describe the functionality for the Service main menu item and the
system parameterization.

8.3.3.1 Admin
Functions in the Admin screen:
● Set authorizations and logout
● Set the time of day and synchronize with the controller
● Select and deselect unlocked operation and test operation
● Clean the screen
● Test of the switch-on step sequence
● Test of the instrumentation and control coupling
● Setting the time-of-day
● Configuration of the excitation

Figure 8-20 Admin screen in the Owner mode authorization level

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 138
Commissioning mode authorization
The authorization for the commissioning mode requires the input of the user name and the
password. After the successful verification, the authorization status is assigned and
displayed.
The commissioning mode is exited by
● Active logout
● Timeout after 30 minutes with no activity
● Remote operation keyswitch position
After clicking the "Login" button, the password for the commissioning mode can be entered.

Figure 8-21 Password input screen

Time
For standard systems, the instrumentation and control of the controller makes the time of
day available regularly in UTC format. At the user interface, clock time, time zone and
summer/winter time can be set and transferred to the active control, if the instrumentation
and control is not providing any clock time signal The PLC sends the clock time in cyclic
telegrams for synchronization to the other components of the 6RV80 THYRIPOL system,
such as inactive channel, display and operator panel, SINAMICS DCM Control Modules.

Unlocked mode
The "unlocked mode" function is implemented as standard and is provided, in particular, for
commissioning the system. In this operating mode, the setpoint limits for the voltage
controller are revoked, for example, to record the no-load and short-circuit characteristic
curve of the generator. Both control modes (automatic and manual) are possible in unlocked
mode.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 139
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

See also Chapter Unlocked mode (Page 168).

Only specially trained qualified personnel may use this operating mode.

Test operation
Test operation mode is an optional operating mode for commissioning and permits the power
section to be powered via an auxiliary infeed. Test operation mode can be selected if an
appropriate feedback of the auxiliary infeed is pending. The test mode is only possible in the
manual mode of control, i.e. direct control of the excitation current specifying a field current
setpoint that is limited in time and capability.

Cleaning the screen

The "Cleaning" function can be used to inhibit the touchscreen so that no undesirable
operations are initiated when cleaning the screen.
The current screen view is retained, but the operator controls are blocked for 60 seconds. A
progress bar shows the time rundown until the release of the screen.

8.3.3.2 Software versions

List of the implemented software versions for the components used in the system:
● Software release
● Software version on the display and operator panel
● SIMATIC S7-PLC version
● SINAMICS DCM SEE version
● CU320-2 version

8.3.3.3 Power Unit

The Power Unit screen shows the current status of the power converters of the power
section.
The following information is shown for each power converter in the system:
● State of the power converter

white Power converter not in operation; no current

flowing
green Power converter in operation; current flowing
yellow Power converter not in operation; fault; no power
flowing

● Present current of the power converter

● Air intake temperature of the power converter.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

140 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

● Differential temperature between the intake and discharge air of the power converter
● State of the fan flaps of the power converter

white Fan flap closed; no air flowing

green Fan flap open; air flowing

● State of the fan

white Fan not in operation

green Fan in operation
red Fan fault

If option X25 "Maintenance during operation" is used in the system, a power converter can
be selected for isolation via the power converter symbols. Disconnection of the power
converter from the AC and DC busbars is represented symbolically. A detailed description of
the "Maintenance during operation" function is provided in Chapter Repair capability during
operation of the power section (Page 218).

Note
The activation of the associated power converter is locked; the rectifier to be repaired cannot
be triggered. The repaired power converter can also be unlocked from this screen. This
release must be confirmed. These actions are documented as operational messages.

Note
The commissioning engineers must install the locked covers on the cabinets before finalizing
commissioning. Nobody can then open the cabinets with a key during operation.

"Maintenance during operation" option

This option can be ordered for the power section variant with n-1 or n-2 power converters,
i.e. redundancy in the power section. It permits service or repair of a power converter during
operation without to the need to shut down the excitation system and therefore also the
generator. This option deenergizes the associated power converter from the 3-phase
alternating current and the direct current. After the deactivation and the grounding of the
affected circuit, the power converter components can be replaced.

8.3.3.4 Operating hours counter

Displays the operating hours of fans and the operating cycles of the switches/disconnecting
switches.

Operating hours counter

The operating hours are displayed for each fan.
The settings for each fan can be changed by clicking the associated actual value.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 141
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Operating cycles counter

The operating cycles of each switch/disconnecting switch are detected and counted by the
system.
The settings for each switch/disconnecting switch can be changed by clicking the associated
actual value.

Note
When a fan is replaced, in the screen form Counters (operating hours)the operating hours
counter of a replaced fan or the switching operations of a switch or disconnector can be
reset.

The settings can be changed by clicking on the relevant actual value.

Figure 8-22 Counters screen

Figure 8-23 Fan settings

See also
Checking the service life of the fans (Page 196)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

142 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

8.3.3.5 Events
The Black Box screen is used to display the values and the states for the fault situation, and
can be selected from the Service menu, Black Box submenu.
Screen structure:
● Top: Display of the fault situation.
● Center: Display of specific values and states in the fault situation interval.
● Bottom: Operator controls to configure the fault recorder.
The following values and states are displayed as standard (obligatory fields):
● External setpoints
● Setpoint feedbacks
● Generator actual values: P, Q, UG, IG
● Exciter actual values: Uf, If, PSS output (for the PSS option)
● Switching states of the internal circuit-breakers and isolators
● On/Off commands, and enables of the instrumentation and control
● External and internal Safety Off signals
● Operating mode states
Eight further quantities from the cyclically available signals can also be recorded. They can
be selected as required from the binary and analog signals for the open- and closed-loop
channel.

The fault recorder is always active and records the current values and states in the
background.
The data is collected in 10 ms cycles in a ring buffer. On occurrence of a fault situation, after
expiration of the post-trigger time, the complete content of the ring buffer is archived on the
display and operator panel. The pre- and post-processing time can be parameterized; the
factory setting for both is 5 seconds. The maximum possible recording duration (pre-
processing time + post-processing time) is 60 seconds.
The fault recorder is triggered for all faults that occur in the system and records the signals
for both channels.
The storage space on the display and operator panel is dimensioned for the permanent
storage of 16 fault situations. The oldest entry is overwritten when further fault situations
occur.
It is possible to display individual fault situations or a recorded fault situations, and transfer
them in CSV format on an external USB storage medium. In commissioning mode, individual
fault situations or the complete list of the fault situations can be deleted.
The fault recorder is configured during the commissioning:
● Signal selection
● Pre- and post-processing time of a fault situation

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 143
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-24 Fault recorder and selection window of the recorded fault situations

8.3.3.6 System trace

The user interface is similar to that for the "Trends" screen. The scale applies to the active
channel. Rather than the trend configuration, the trace configuration is opened. An additional
button allows the trigger condition to be set.
In addition, the signals to be recorded are selected and the trigger conditions (trigger type,
limit value, pre- and post-processing time) are specified.

Figure 8-25 System trace screen

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

144 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

The occurrence of a trace condition (trigger) and the availability of a new trace situation are
displayed in the operator panel. This trace reminder can be reset with the "Stop Trace" key,
see the next section.
The trace can record as many as 8 signals with a resolution of 10 ms and a maximum
recording duration of 60 seconds. As many as 16 trace recordings can exist in the system;
further trace recordings overwrite the oldest recordings.

Figure 8-26 System trace configuration

Figure 8-27 System trace setting of the trigger condition using the example of a positive edge

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 145
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

8.3.3.7 Logbook
Similar to the Messages screen, the user interface shows a list of messages in the center.
This lists:
● The operational messages
● The faults and alarms
● All parameter changes
● All commands from the instrumentation and control, and as local operation
● The setting of authorization levels
The entries consist of a time stamp, the fault number (formed from the channel number and
the fault), and the short message. A button below the list can be used to export the logbook.
In commissioning mode, a button is provided to clear the logbook buffer. This deletes only
the message display, The logbook messages archived in the file system are not deleted and
can be viewed after exporting the logbook archive.

8.3.3.8 Parameters
The individual software components of the THYRIPOL system allow intervention options
using parameters. The core of the generator voltage controller and the control of the starting
frequency converter are located on SINAMICS components on which the SINAMICS
parameterization system acts. Details for this system are contained in the SINAMICS
operating instructions.
The parameter types in the THYRIPOL system follow:

Figure 8-28 Parameter types

The BICO technology (BICO – Binector Connector technology permits the connection of
runtime signals taking account of certain operating states) in the SINAMICS components
permits the customization of a SINAMICS device to the various requirements.
The operation of the control functions is also customized in a parameter system on the
SIMATIC PLC. This allows parameters to be changed in the controller and via the display
and operator panel during operation without requiring the SIMATIC Manager programming
software.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

146 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 The following commissioning tasks are handled in this screen group:
● Parameterize all components
● Archive and compare parameterization data
● Load parameterization data to the components
● Reload from the components
The system configuration is linked with the commissioning mode authorization.
The parameter lists support the tasks: display, change and compare parameters in list form.
The signal number, name, value and its unit are each shown in a column.
If the parameter is an actual value (display parameter), its value is grayed-out and cannot be
changed. The parameters are defined for each component with the associated system
software; they can be imported when the user-interface application starts by means of an
import mechanism.
The values of the setting parameters are stored non-volatile in the associated components.
The signal number consists of two parts: the component designation and the parameter
number. A distinction is made between the individual drive objects (DO) on the SINAMICS
components using the component identifier. The S7 controller is included in this concept and
is defined as Drive Object PLC.
The following component designations are available:
● PLC - Programmable Logic Controller (S7 controller)
● EXC - Excitation (excitation – voltage controller)
● SFC - Starting Frequency Converter
The following Drive Objects (DOs), if present, are defined in the components:
● PLC1 - controller
● EXC1 - excitation device DO
● EXC2 - excitation voltage controller DO
● SFC1 - starting frequency converter (GL 150) device DO
● SFC2 - starting frequency converter (GL 150), closed-loop control DO

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 147
 Representation of an indexed parameter:

Figure 8-29 Parameter representation (1)

Indexed parameters have a button. If this is pressed, additional indexes are opened below.

Figure 8-30 Parameter representation (2)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 148
 If a binary type is involved, this field also corresponds to a button. When the button is
clicked, the individual bits are then represented as follows:

Figure 8-31 Parameter representation (3)

Click the desired parameter in a numeric field of the display and operator panel to open a
virtual keyboard with which parameter numbers and values can be entered:

Figure 8-32 Virtual keyboard 1

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 149
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-33 Virtual keyboard 2

The setting parameters can be changed in commissioning mode. No values for setting
parameters can be changed in the Owner mode authorization level.

Parameter types overview

● Setting parameters
– Standard setting parameters
– Indexed setting parameters
– Connection parameters for analog values
– Connection parameters for digital values
– Indexed connection parameters for analog values
– Indexed connection parameters for digital values
● Monitoring parameters
– Standard monitoring parameters
– Indexed monitoring parameters
Setting parameters can be represented as follows:
● Decimal
● Binary
● Hexadecimal
● ASCII
● BICO

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

150 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Entering parameters
Setting parameters are entered via the parameter list.
1. If a value needs to be entered, select the associated value field of the setting parameter.
The value fields are implemented as buttons.
2. The virtual keyboard opens.
3. Enter the desired value from the numeric keypad and press Enter to confirm.

Help lists
The help lists contain parameters grouped into logical tasks:
Grouping of parameters for processing
● Configuration of a logical task
● Standardization topics
– Interconnection and scaling of outputs
– Display of binary inputs and outputs
These logical lists are imported during the system startup. They can be easily customized
with the display and operator panel. The customization is made by the export and import of
these lists in CSV format. The display and operator panel permits the management of 16
different lists.

Expert lists
All available parameters in the system can be accessed from the expert lists. The only
exceptions are parameters for activating options. Expert lists are available for the following
components:
● PLC1 - controller
● EXC1 - excitation base DO
● EXC2 - excitation voltage controller DO
● SFC1 - starting frequency converter (GL 150) device DO
● SFC2 - starting frequency converter (GL 150), closed-loop control DO

Parameter set comparison

When comparing parameters, you can compare between two complete data sets or between
both channels of a data set by pressing the "Analysis" button. This display is made as
parameter list. The parameter values cannot be changed in comparison mode. Filtering can
be made for equal and unequal values.
The parameter comparison can be made while the excitation system is operating. This task
does not impair the operation of the system.
In the commissioning mode and expert mode authorization levels, a dedicated button allows
the selection of a parameter set and the import into the system. This button is active in these
authorization levels.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 151
Operation
8.3 User interface of the display and operator panel

Figure 8-34 Parameter comparison

Importing and exporting parameter sets

For the import, a new parameter data set can be created or an existing one selected to be
overwritten.
When you export an existing parameter data set, select from the available parameter data
sets.
A temporary window for the navigation opens for the export and import. This window opens
for searching and saving in the file system of the external data medium (USB medium).

Figure 8-35 Importing and exporting parameters

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

152 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

Switching off the display and operator panel

To prevent loss of data (e.g. trend recordings, message buffer, fault recorder recordings, …),
the display and operator panel application must always be terminated using the "Close
application" function. Because data loss can also occur for failure of the power supply, A fail-
safe battery voltage must therefore be ensured for the excitation system.

Figure 8-36 Switching off the application from the Service - Admin menu

8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

The "Automatic" (generator voltage regulation) and "Manual" (field current control) operating
modes of the open- and closed-loop control system can be selected either on the display
and operator panel or via the instrumentation and control depending on the key-operated
switch position.

8.4.1 Automatic mode – voltage regulator mode

An overview of the basic controller structure is shown in the 5800 and 5802 function
diagrams.
The automatic mode is described in the 5969 and 5970 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL
closed-loop control list manual.

8.4.1.1 Controller structure

The digital voltage regulator is used for the closed-loop control of the excitation for
synchronous generators. The design of the power system stabilizer is the same as model
ST6B in accordance with IEEE 421.5. The requirements placed on a "high initial response"
controller system in accordance with IEEE 421.2 are satisfied.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 153
Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

The open- and closed-loop control is provided redundant on the redundant variant (option
U15). Both channels are identical and under normal operating conditions operate as voltage
regulators in automatic mode. The channels can be switched to field-current controlled
operation (manual mode) for commissioning, maintenance or in special situations.
The channels are electrically independent of each other; each has its own power supplies.
This makes it possible to de-energize a channel for repairs or maintenance work.
Either only channel 1 or channel 2 is always accessible for activating the power section. The
display and operator panel is used to select which channel should be the active channel. The
associated gate trigger pulses and actual values of the excitation circuit at the channel
outputs are also switched over. The inactive channel is corrected in all operating modes to
ensure a smooth transition at the channel switchover (in all operating points).

8.4.1.2 Actual value acquisition and preparation of the generator variables

See also the 5840, 5842, 5844, 5846 and 5848 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL closed-
loop control list manual.
The generator voltage and current are read in as three-phase values via transformers at
analog inputs of the BCU. From these analog values, the current and voltage are calculated
in the space vector system (α-β-0 system). Effective values of generator voltage and
generator current, the frequency, active and reactive current, as well as the power variables
of the generator are determined from these variables.
All used voltage and current values are normalized to their rated values. The sum of the
three momentary phase voltages and the sum of the three momentary phase currents are
used for monitoring the actual value acquisition.

Figure 8-37 Example: 3-phase actual value acquisition for current and voltage

The three phases of the stator voltage and three phases of the stator current are read in and
each multiplied by a factor for voltage or current. These factors take into account the plant-
specific transformer ratios and resistance values of the loads as well as corresponding
tolerances. When commissioning, these factors are set such that the actual voltage and

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

154 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

current values are mapped 100% in rated operation in both controller channels. The rated
frequency of the (50 Hz, 60 Hz or 16 2/3 Hz) generator can be set with the EXC2.55002
parameter.
From the recorded alternating voltages and currents, the momentary voltage and current
phasors in the α/β system as well as the zero voltage and the zero current are determined as
vectors. The calculated zero sequence system is used exclusively for monitoring the actual
value recording.
From the α/β components of the voltages and currents, the amount of the generator voltage
and the amount of the generator current are calculated as well as the active, reactive and
apparent power. The active power and the reactive power are taken to determine the active
current and the reactive current, where the calculation is made only above a parameterized
minimum voltage, otherwise these quantities are set to zero.
The following converter configurations are supported:

Current Voltage
3-phase 3-phase
2-phase 3-phase

8.4.1.3 Setpoint control

See also the 5910, 5922, 5924, 5926, 5928 and 5930 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL
closed-loop control list manual and the 560 function diagram in the THYRIPOL open-loop
control list manual.
In the LOCAL key-operated switch position, the automatic mode of the generator voltage
control can be preselected at the display and operator panel on the switchgear cabinet door
of the control cabinet. If the generator circuit-breaker is closed and the generator is
connected to the supply system, the setting range of the generator voltage setpoint is limited
to the generator operation range. This is also true when the generator circuit-breaker is
open.
The setting range can be parameterized system-specific for both states of the generator
circuit-breaker.
For automatic mode, in the REMOTE key-operated switch position, the generator voltage
setpoint is specified by a higher-level instrumentation and control or by an optional, higher-
level reactive power or power factor control.
For a single wire coupling, the generator voltage setpoint can be specified by an analog
4 … 20 mA signal. Rather than the single wire coupling, the setpoint can be changed using
Up/Down commands.
In addition, two inputs for the Up/Down commands on the generator voltage setpoint
generator from the synchronization unit are available for the synchronization.
If the excitation is switched off, the setpoint generator is set to a start setpoint
(EXC2.p55350). If a setpoint is specified outside the setting range permitted by the operating
mode, the setpoint generator will be limited. If the setpoint generator is at the upper or lower
limit, a message will be issued to the instrumentation and control (option).
The setpoint generator is corrected to the current values of the system via the
instrumentation and control connection. This correction is required for interventions from the
display and operator panel or by the synchronization unit.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 155
Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

8.4.1.4 Underexcitation limitation

See also the 5964 and 5965 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list
manual.
This function ensures the minimum field current required for stable parallel operation of the
generator with the supply system and limits the reactive power accordingly in the
underexcited range.
In automatic mode, the voltage regulation is overridden using a maximum selection when the
underexcitation limitation is activated (see 5970 function diagram in the THYRIPOL closed-
loop control list manual).
The underexcitation characteristic curve (see 5964 function diagram) is parameterized
system-specific in the EXC2.55752 and EXC2.55753 parameters. When the exciter system
is deployed in a pumped-storage power plant, the underexcitation characteristic curve for the
pump operation can be set using the EXC2.55754 and EXC2.55755 parameters.
The limit characteristic curve is also moved based on the generator actual voltage value. The
intervention of the underexcitation limitation is not delayed. If the underexcitation limitation
acts, no setpoint down commands or lower setpoints are accepted, and this intervention is
reported to the instrumentation and control.
Optional (see function diagram 5965, parameter EXC2.55789 and EXC2.55790) the
threshold for initiating an alarm (EXC2.55795.1) can be set, whereby the margin to the limit
can be adjusted in the range from 0 % up to 10 %. If the threshold is set to 0%, no alarm is
issued and EXC2.55795.1 is not set.
The reactive current value of the characteristic corresponding to the active current is
compared with the current operational reactive current value. This difference is increased.
If the characteristic curve is exceeded, the increased differential causes an increase in the
field current and a message to this effect is sent to the instrumentation and control while the
limitation acts.
For commissioning purposes, the characteristic curve can be mirrored in the overexcited
range. This switches the effect direction of the intervention signal and also the blocking of
the setpoint generator.

8.4.1.5 Overexcitation limitation

See also the 5966 and 5968 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list
manual.
The overexcitation limitation prevents the generator rotor from being thermally overloaded.
The dynamic response of the effect can be parameterized (see parameters in the 5966 and
5968 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list manual).
The characteristic-controlled overexcitation limitation acts either cold-gas temperature-
dependent or above 110% of the rated field current time-delayed using a supplementary
setpoint and reduces the field current accordingly. The more the limit is exceeded, the
sooner that the reduction acts.
As an option, the overexcitation limitation can be parameterized in accordance with
generator standard ANSI C50.13.
If the cold-gas actual temperature value fails, a fixed limit value can be set using a
parameter. This characteristic curve and these values must be specified project-specific by

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

156 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

the purchaser. If the generator has a regulated cooling circuit, a defined maximum value is
specified.
The overexcitation limitation acts time-delayed by the reciprocal proportional value. The
setting of the overexcitation limitation must match the ceiling current limitation. The duration
of overexcitation and the subsequent reduction to a value which precludes the thermal
overload of the field winding is achieved characteristic-controlled.
The intervention of the overexcitation limitation is indicated in EXC2.55870.1 and sent to the
instrumentation and control. If the overexcitation limitation acts, no setpoint up commands or
higher setpoints are accepted.
As an option, (see 5966 function diagram, EXC2.55860 and EXC2.55861) the threshold for
issuing an alarm (EXC2.55780.0) can be set. The difference to the limit can be set in the
range 0% to 10%. If the threshold is set to 0%, no alarm is issued and EXC2.55780.0 is not
set.

8.4.1.6 Stator current limitation

See also the 5944 and 5946 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list
manual.
This function is used to limit the stator current of the generator. The stator current required
for the generator's max. apparent power forms the response value for stator current
limitation. This consists of one control circuit for each of the overexcited and underexcited
ranges. This limit is activated with delay (more specifically, a delay which is inversely
proportional to the absolute value of the overcurrent in relation to the response value), when
the response value is exceeded. In a range with low reactive current (±10%), the voltage
regulation can only have a minimal influence on the stator current and the stator current
limitation does not act in this case. If the stator current limitation acts, this is reported with a
message on the display and operator panel and to the instrumentation and control.
The output of the stator current limitation is added to the voltage setpoint in accordance with
the ramp-function generator.
As an option, the stator current limitation can be parameterized in accordance with generator
standard ANSI C50.13.

8.4.1.7 Shock excitation limitation

See also function diagram 5989 in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list manual.
The surge current limitation limits the field current without delay, for example in the case of a
short-circuit or for faults in the supply system.
Parameter assignment:
EXC2.55400 = setting of the surge field current
After expiration of the permitted shock excitation duration, the overexcitation limitation acts
and returns the field current to a normal operating value. The surge current limitation is a P
controller. A "field forcing relay" function is provided, i.e. the limitation controller acts
optionally time-delayed (maximum 100 ms).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 157
Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

8.4.1.8 V/f limitation

See also function diagram 5948 in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list manual.
This V/f limitation protects the unit transformer and connected inductances from the effects
of saturation and intervenes before any V/f protection mechanism is able to respond.
The V/f limitation reduces the voltage setpoint linearly. The limit values can be
parameterized.

Figure 8-38 V/f limitation for a 50 Hz supply system

8.4.1.9 Reactive current droop and reactive current compensation

See also function diagram 5940 in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list manual.
These functions are also named as follows:
● Reactive load distribution (droop)
● Compensation of the longitudinal voltage drop to the line (compensation)
The droop function is used to set the reactive load distribution for generators running in
parallel by reducing the field current as the inductive reactive power output increases. The
compensation of the longitudinal voltage drop to the line is performed by raising the field
current while the inductive reactive power output is increasing.

8.4.1.10 Stage of the unit transformer tap changer

See also function diagram 5932 in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list manual.
If the overexcitation or underexcitation limitation is being used in automatic mode or the
actual voltage value is at a settable upper or lower limit, up/down signals can be sent to the
instrumentation and control, which in these cases adjust the unit transformer tap changers.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

158 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

8.4.2 Manual mode – field current controller operation (ECR)

See also function diagram 5989 in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list manual.
In this operating mode, the field current setpoint can be set within the range of about
0...110% of the rated field current. No generator voltage control takes place.
If the generator is not connected to the supply system, the upper limit field-current controller
is reduced to a value that corresponds to 110% of the no-load field current.
If a switch is made from automatic to manual mode, the most recently acquired field actual
current value of the automatic mode is specified for the field current setpoint.
The limits of the stator current, underexcitation, V/f, and overexcitation have no effect in this
mode.

8.4.2.1 Controller structure

The controller structure of the field current controller corresponds to that of a PI controller.
The structure is also shown in function diagram 5989 in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control
list manual.

8.4.3 Oscillation damping device (optionally available)

Also see function diagrams 5880, 5882, 5884, 5890, 5892, 5898 and 5900 in the THYRIPOL
List Manual for closed-loop control - and function diagram 570 in the THYRIPOL List Manual
for open-loop control.
With active power oscillations, a signal is generated that has a damping effect on these
oscillations via the excitation. The power system stabilizer generates a supplementary signal
from the active power and/or the compensated frequency. This is connected as a
supplementary signal of the control path of the voltage regulator if the power system
stabilizer is active and if the current active power is greater than 20% of the rated value. The
power system stabilizer parameters are set specifically for each system. Under steady-state
operating conditions, power stabilization has no effect. Only in the event of oscillations in the
active power does the power system stabilizer start to operate and intervene in voltage
regulation. In terms of the phase position and gain, the supplementary signal is dimensioned
so that active-power oscillations between the generator and the line are damped. The extent
to which the device is able to intervene is limited so that a voltage deviation from the setpoint
of normally ±5%, measured in relation to the actual operating point, cannot be exceeded.
The configuration of the PSS can be switched between two different models: As standard,
the H-infinite model conforming to IEEE model PSS3B (option S07) is used. Optionally, a
power system stabilizer can be parameterized in accordance with IEEE model PSS2B
(option S06).

8.4.4 Switching the automatic/manual controller modes

See also the 5986 function diagram in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list manual and the
530 and 540 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL open-loop control list manual.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 159
Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

The "Automatic" operating mode is active after switching on the supply and after the
software has booted. The generator can start in the "automatic" or "manual" operating mode.
A switchover is made only when the other operating mode can operate correctly. Switchover
is also possible for disabled excitation. The operating mode is switched when the appropriate
commands come from the instrumentation and control, display and operator panel or
switching logic because of a fault situation. The current mode is reported on the display and
operator panel and on the instrumentation and control.

Emergency switching from automatic mode to manual mode

The following faults cause at least an emergency switching to the manual channel and also
prevent a switchover to the automatic channel for a single channel system variant:
● Circuit-breaker acting in the generator actual voltage value acquisition circuit
● Ceiling current monitoring
● Ceiling voltage monitoring
● Phase failure monitoring UG acquisition
● Internal fault in automatic mode
For more details, see AUTOHOTSPOT.

8.4.5 Reactive power control and power factor control - option S31
See also the 5862, 5864, 5866, 5868 and 5870 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL closed-
loop control list manual and 500, 501 and 510 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL open-
loop control list manual.
The voltage regulator can be superimposed by a reactive power or cos phi control. This can
be activated when the generator is connected to the power network and the automatic mode
is active. If one of these conditions is no longer met, this control is deactivated again. Note
that with active reactive power or cos phi control, the voltage setpoint can no longer be
directly influenced.
A ramp-function generator is incorporated in the reactive power controller, by means of
which the specified reactive power setpoint is maintained. The ramp-function generator is
corrected to the current reactive power actual value when the higher-level control is switched
off to ensure a smooth switchover at all times. This correspondingly applies to the cos phi
setpoint generator of the cos phi control.
The corresponding setpoint is changed via the read up/down signals or for analog setpoint
specifications by correcting the setpoint generator to the specified analog setpoint.
The cos phi control automatically adjusts itself internally to setpoint cos phi = 1 if the
generator current falls below 20% of its rated value, because an exact cos phi calculation is
then no longer possible. If the limit value for minimum current is exceeded again, the real cos
phi actual value is used again as a control variable.
A setpoint/actual value comparison of the reactive power and of the cos phi produces
positioning commands for the generator voltage setpoint generator. An external setpoint
specification for the setpoint generator of the generator voltage is locked in this case.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

160 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

8.4.6 Reactive power compensatory control (optionally available)

The exchange of reactive power between the power plant and the supply system should be
assigned as uniform percentage to all generators in accordance with their rated power. After
the compensation between the blocks, the reactive power no longer runs as loop with regard
to generation and consumption. Without manual operator functions, the compensation
adapts itself again to the new supply system situations with a slow transition function. The
compensation should not be configured as a fast dynamic action, but rather over a time
interval of several minutes.
The reactive power compensation control can be realized for a maximum of 6 generators,
independent of whether these generators are driven by gas or steam turbines. The
compensation between the individual generators is made via a bus connection of the
excitation system. The instrumentation and control is not involved in the reactive power
compensatory control.
A ring topology is used for the bus connection between the excitation systems. The reactive
power compensation control functions with all excitation systems connected on the
communications ring that permit communication in one of the two directions on the ring.
The ring topology permits increased availability in the following situations:
● One node fails (e.g. electronics power supply of the SES) then the reactive power
compensation control remains active for the remaining devices as a result of the
communication ring.
● If one connection between two nodes fails, the ring topology makes it possible to keep the
reactive power compensatory control active on all nodes.
● Both nodes fail (e.g. electronics supply of Unit 3 and Unit 6), one reactive power
compensatory control takes place between Unit 1 and Unit 2 and another one between
Unit 4 and Unit 5. In such a case, no reactive power compensatory control between the
remaining four units is possible.

Figure 8-39 Overview of the ring bus topology

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 161
Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

Activation of the reactive power compensatory control

The reactive power compensatory control can be activated only in the following operating
modes:
● Generator voltage control (automatic operation)
● Reactive power control
It must be activated from the instrumentation and control The reactive power compensation
control cannot be activated when the excitation system is operated in a different mode. The
reactive power compensatory control is deactivated when a switch is made to local
operation.

Operation of the reactive power compensatory control

The compensation is made with a slow adjustment of the generator voltage setpoint (for the
reactive power control to the reactive power setpoint). When several generators are selected
for the reactive power compensation, the complete reactive power (sum of the percentage
actual reactive powers of the machines involved with the reactive power compensatory
control rather than the complete reactive power of the power plant) is determined and
assigned to the generators involved as percentage. The setpoints of all involved machines
are now changed until the reactive power of the activated generators in the appropriate
proportions are compensated with an adjustable regulating tolerance (maximum ±0.5%
based on 1 p.u.).
The rated apparent power in accordance with the standardization of the generator actual
values in the exciter unit is used as reference quantity (1 p.u.). After the completed
compensation control, the total reactive power of a power plant can differ from the reactive
power total value determined at the start of the compensation. The activation or deactivation
of the reactive power compensatory control for further generators produces a new total
reactive power.

Note
Supply system effects are mastered as part of the voltage control with the aim of regulating
the distribution of the reactive power.
If the instrumentation and control needs to change the voltage or reactive power setpoint for
a generator, this exciter system must first be taken from the reactive power compensatory
control. This requires that the "reactive power compensatory control OFF" command is
issued so that the setpoints in the instrumentation and control can be changed again. For
compensated reactive power, the remaining SES in the reactive power compensation control
do not initiate a change of the compensated state, because the missing SES does not
change the quotient of the total reactive power and the number of participants. On
completion of the setpoint adjustment, the exciter system can again participate on the
reactive power compensatory control. This leads to a smooth distribution of the newly added
reactive power under all involved generators.
In the reactive power compensatory control operating mode, the generator can be operated
only within the permitted limits, i.e. all limitations of the closed-loop control as well as the
voltage control range are active. When the limitation functions are triggered, the generator
remains active in the reactive power compensatory control, but then does not satisfy the
reactive power compensatory control comparison value for intervention of the limitation. For

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

162 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

intervention of a limitation, the system remains in the limitation and so contributes to the
maximum possible share for the reactive power creation or consumption.

Deactivation of the reactive power compensatory control

Normally, the reactive power compensation control of an excitation system is deactivated
from the instrumentation and control. This influences the particular excitation system;
reactive power compensation control is effective for all of the other excitation systems.
The reactive power compensation control is also deactivated when one of the following
states occurs in the excitation system:
● Switchover to manual mode
● Switchover to power factor control
● Switchover to local operation using a keyswitch
● Communication error to the other excitation systems
● The power plant block is taken from the supply system
● Protection off

8.4.7 Operation of the starting converter

The line-side power converter is commutated by the secondary 3-phase output of the power
converter transformer.
The motor-side power converter is load-commutated and is commutated from the generator
terminal voltage. The motor-side power converter switches the DC-link current from one
stator coil to the next so that a rotating field is generated in the generator stator which is
induced in the generator rotor in phase synchronism. The DC-link current is switched to the
individual winding phases using voltage clocking in synchronism with the instantaneous
frequency, and more specifically, when the continually rotating rotor, and thus also the
continually rotating flux, has rotated by a further 60° el.
The motor-side power converter so fulfills the function of an electronic commutator, with a
method of operation similar to the mechanical commutator on DC motors, which assigns the
armature ampere-turn to the magnetic flux, and induces switching in accordance with rotor
rotation.
With this control technique, oscillations and out-of-step operation cannot occur as is the case
with synchronous machines which are operated with a direct connection to the line.
By orienting the armature ampere-turns to the magnetic flux, the effect of the rotor load angle
on commutation, which occurs with rotor-position-encoder clocking, is automatically
eliminated. The elimination of the rotor position encoder and cable connection eliminates
these potential fault sources.
The starting and converter modes of the generator can be initiated only from the
instrumentation and control.
While the generator is being started via the starting frequency converter, the excitation
system adjusts the generator terminal voltage to match the starting frequency converter.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 163
Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

In the lowest speed range, the voltage increases linearly with the speed. Above the transition
speed, at which the generator reaches the rated voltage of the starting frequency converter,
the generator voltage is kept constant by the excitation system by reducing the field current
(field weakening).
After accelerating the machine set, the starting frequency converter is switched off by the
higher-level instrumentation and control.

8.4.8 Operating modes of the compact system

See also the 250 to 279 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL open-loop control list manual.

8.4.8.1 Normal start

The starting converter accelerates the gas turbine set from standstill or from the turning
speed to the shut-off limit of the starting converter. The shutoff limit is normally approx. 70%
of the rated speed. Above this speed, the gas turbine accelerates only the turbine set up to
synchronization speed.

8.4.8.2 Hold firing speed (optionally available)

This operating mode always corresponds to the normal start operating mode.
If during the startup of the turbine by the starting converter the associated signal is set by the
instrumentation and control,
the starting converter remains at the firing speed. The startup continues only when the "Hold
firing speed" signal is removed again.

8.4.8.3 Fast gas start

This operating mode always corresponds to the normal start operating mode. A dedicated
parameterization, however, is used for the ramp-up.

8.4.8.4 Starting with two starting profiles (optionally available)

This operating mode always corresponds to the normal start operating mode. A dedicated
parameterization, however, is used for the ramp-up.

8.4.8.5 Washing operation

To clean the compressor and turbine blades, the turbo set is accelerated using the starting
converter. During washing, the speed can oscillate between the upper and lower limit. The
speed limits can be set for each turbine type.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

164 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

8.4.8.6 Ventilation of the boiler (optionally available)

To ensure that after a false start of the gas turbine no combustible gas mixture remains in
the turbine, boiler or exhaust gas stack, the "ventilation" operating mode can be used for a
set time during the startup.
During ventilation, the speed oscillates between the upper and lower limit. The speed limits
can be set for each turbine type.

8.4.8.7 Fast cooling of the gas turbine (optionally available)

In this operating mode, the starting converter controls the speeds as for the boiler ventilation
operating mode. The gas turbine is cooled with an increased air flow. An inspection of the
gas turbine is performed after completion of this operating mode. After this operating mode,
the next start is released by the instrumentation and control only after 24 hours. The pause
serves to cool the starting converter components:

8.4.8.8 Phase shifter start (optionally available)

The generator is accelerated to a speed slightly above the synchronous speed via the
starting converter. After the starting converter has been disconnected, the generator is
excited to the rated voltage and is synchronized with the line at a synchronous speed during
runout.

8.4.8.9 Braking operation (optionally available)

The generator is disconnected from the line, controlled down to the starting frequency
converter voltage and then braked via the converter. The braking power is fed back into the
line.
The starting converter returns the mechanical energy back into the supply system, where the
machine-side power converter acts as rectifier whereas the line-side converter acts as
inverter. The starting converter is switched off automatically when the rotor speed
undershoots a parameterized limit value.
This operating mode is only intended for use in conjunction with phase shifter operation.

8.4.8.10 Emergency turning (optionally available)

For this operating mode, the stator current (starting converter) and the rotor current
(excitation equipment) are limited because the low speed means unfavorable cooling
conditions prevail in the generator and the operating mode will be performed longer. This
causes the gas turbine to be kept rotating at slow speed (approximately 4%).
The operating mode prevents the shaft of the gas turbine from drooping or deforming during
a standstill because of its own weight or during cooling because of resulting mechanical
tensions.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 165
8.4.8.11 Self-contained starting (optionally available)
See also the 480 to 486 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL open-loop control list manual.
The "Self-contained start" function allows the compact unit to be ramped up using an
auxiliary infeed and a secondary power supply, for example, with a diesel generator. After
the system has been accelerated to its rated speed, with the SES "ON" command from the
instrumentation and control, the excitation system excites the generator up to the rated
voltage. After being excited, a switchover is made to the main infeed.

8.4.8.12 Boiler ventilating in the self-contained starting situation (optionally available)

This operating mode is required when the excitation equipment is connected to the generator
leads and the power plant should have self-contained starting capability.
For safety reasons, prior to starting the gas turbine on request from the boiler protection, the
boiler is ventilated. As for the self-contained starting operating mode, the second infeed of
the excitation equipment is started.

8.4.9 Water-power operating modes

These operating modes are deployed only for hydroelectric power plants. For these
operating modes, different open- and closed-loop activation and deactivation criteria
compared with the other operating modes sometimes apply. See also the 180 to 183
function diagrams in the THYRIPOL open-loop control list manual.

8.4.9.1 Electrical braking on short-circuit (optionally available)

This operating mode brings the generator to a standstill as fast as possible.
The stator winding is short-circuited over 3-poles for an open generator switch and the
excitation current is regulated to a fixed value. The resulting generated eddy currents in the
rotor produce a braking torque and so bring the machine quickly to a standstill. The control
and monitoring of the operation over time is made by the higher-level process
instrumentation and control. Although local operation is not possible, the activated operating
mode is displayed on the display and operator panel.
When this operating mode is activated, the excitation system switches to manual operation
and does not return to automatic operation until after completion. To ensure the power
supply to the power section for terminal-fed excitation system in this operating mode, a
second infeed must be provided.

8.4.9.2 Converter braking for pumped-storage power plants (optionally available)

This operating mode brings the generator to a standstill as fast as possible. The control and
monitoring of the operation over time is made by the higher-level process instrumentation
and control. This operating mode is not available for compact units. Although local operation
is not possible, the activated operating mode is displayed on the display and operator panel.
When this operating mode is activated, the excitation system remains in the selected manual
operating mode (setpoint from the converter or fixed setpoint) or automatic operation.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 166
 Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

After completion, automatic operation is always activated. Because the converter is also
used in this operating mode, the power supply to the excitation system from the (normal)
exciter transformer is ensured. Consequently, a second power infeed is not normally
required (exception: terminal-fed excitation).

8.4.9.3 Converter start for pumped-storage power plants (optionally available)

This operating mode for pumped-storage power plants brings the generator to its rated
speed and synchronizes it with the supply system. The control and monitoring of the
operation over time is made by the higher-level process instrumentation and control.
Although local operation is not possible, the activated operating mode is displayed on the
display and operator panel. When this operating mode is activated, the excitation system
switches either to manual operating mode (setpoint from the converter or fixed setpoint) or
automatic operation depending on the specific implementation in the plant.
Once the "converter start" operating mode has completed (generator synchronized with the
supply system), an automatic switchover is made to automatic operation. Because the
converter is also used in this operating mode, the power supply to the excitation system from
the (normal) exciter transformer is ensured. Consequently, a second power infeed is not
normally required (exception: Terminal-fed excitation system).

8.4.9.4 Ramp-up conductor (optionally available)

This operating mode is used primarily for hydroelectric or pumped-storage power plants to
bring a (black) conductor up to voltage and so permit the establishing of the supply system
or to operate an insular supply system. For this operating mode, consider the supply
voltages still present in the power plant. This is normally the battery supply.
For externally-supplied machines, ensure that the exciter transformer can be supplied
appropriately with voltage. This can normally be done with appropriate switch positions.
Because the conductor (complete or sections) is ramped-up, the machine transformer and
the conductor is already connected to the generator when the excitation is switched on. The
control and monitoring of the operation over time is made by the higher-level process
instrumentation and control.
Although local operation is not possible, the activated operating mode is displayed on the
display and operator panel. When this operating mode is activated, the excitation system
switches either to manual operating mode or automatic operation depending on the specific
implementation in the plant. After completion, automatic operation is always activated.

8.4.9.5 Back-to-back start (optionally available)

The option is deployed for pumped-storage power plants with multiple machines. Normally
only one converter is available for start-up; if this converter fails, one machine should be
used as generator in order to ramp-up the other as motor. The two units are coupled via the
stator. The principle corresponds to an electrical shaft. The machine operating as motor is
synchronized with the supply system as pump after the ramp-up. The control and monitoring
of the operation over time is made by the higher-level process instrumentation and control.
Although local operation is not possible, the activated operating mode is displayed on the
display and operator panel. When this operating mode is activated, the excitation system
goes into the manual mode with a fixed setpoint for both machines. Once the machine

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 167
Operation
8.4 Modes of the static excitation system

operating as motor has been synchronized with the supply system, the associated excitation
system switches to automatic mode while the other unit shuts down.

8.4.10 Unlocked mode

This operating mode is permitted only during commissioning or inspection.
The unlocked mode is selected at the display and operator panel, and is available in the
commissioning mode. In the unlocked mode, corresponding voltage/current limits are lifted
or extended and locks removed.
In the unlocked mode, both automatic and manual operation are possible.
In the locked operation, the excitation can be switched off independent of the
feedback/position of the generator circuit-breaker.
The unlocked mode can only be locally selected/deselected at the display and operator
panel if the excitation is switched off.

WARNING
Specialist personnel
In this operating mode, only trained specialist personnel can operate the system.
Incorrect operation of the system can result in death, severe injury and significant material
damage.

8.4.11 Test excitation (optionally available)

The "Test excitation" function serves to check the main current transformer and the attached
protective devices during commissioning.
A power supply during short-circuit operation is not possible for exciter systems whose
supplying transformer is connected to the generator lead. For such systems, it is not possible
to generate excitation current and so stator current in the generator.
To ensure the power supply of the exciter system in the short-circuit attempt, the system
must provide a branch of the 400 V busbar. This provides the exciter system with its power
supply during the attempts. The wiring of this infeed is permanent. For this operating mode,
the fans are switched to the external fan supply of the 400 V busbar. The system must
provide an appropriate supply of the fans.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

168 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.5 Execution variants of the open-loop/closed-loop channel

Figure 8-40 Schematic representation of the "Test excitation" function

8.5 Execution variants of the open-loop/closed-loop channel

The two open- and closed-loop channels have an identical structure. Only the compensating
values of the actual value sensing differ in the two channels.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 169
Redundant variant of the open- and closed-loop control system
The response of the system for a fault in the function for the redundant variant of the open-
and closed-loop control:

Occurrence of a fault... System response when the fault occurs

No response Safety OFF Channel switch- Switchover to ECR
over
In the controller In the active chan- x
nel
In both channels x
In the instrumenta- In the active chan- x
tion and control nel
coupling In both channels x
In the monitoring In the active chan- x
nel
In both channels x
In the AVR *) In the active chan- x
nel
In both channels x
In the ECR *) In the active chan- x
nel
In both channels x

*) Note: The associated operating mode is selected when the fault occurs.

For the two-channel variant, a single fault does not cause shutdown of the system. The
defective open- and closed-loop control channel can be repaired during operation of the
turbo set while the second channel undertakes the open- and closed-loop control tasks.
The two-channel capability for the open- and closed-loop control includes the following
functions:
● Actual value acquisition of the generator voltage
● Actual value acquisition of the generator current
● Actual value acquisition of the field current
● Actual value acquisition of the field voltage
● Control set function, including the synchronizing voltage acquisition
● Control function with acquisition of the system status (internal and external) and
command output
● Internal monitoring function
● Closed-loop control function, including field current control
● Safety OFF function, decoupling to the generator protection

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 170
 Operation
8.5 Execution variants of the open-loop/closed-loop channel

Single channel (non redundant) version of the open-loop and closed-loop control channel:
If only one open-loop/closed-loop channel is available, functions such as channel switching
and switching block do not exist. This also changes the system response for function error:

Occurrence of a fault... System response when the fault occurs

No response Safety OFF Switchover to ECR
In the controller x
In the instrumentation and control cou- x
pling
In the monitoring x
In the AVR *) x
In the ECR *) x

*) Note: The associated operating mode is selected when the fault occurs.

Because of the single-channel variant, only one channel is displayed in the user interface.
Operator actions, which are not possible (e.g.: channel switchover) are not displayed.

Figure 8-41 Values screen with absolute value representation - single channel

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 171
8.6 Switching on the static excitation system
See also the 110, 115 and 116 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL open-loop control list
manual.
The activation of the system and of the exciter is controlled in the SIMATIC S7.
After switching on the external power supply (supply of all control voltages of the voltage
regulator, see circuit manual), the individual components of the open-loop and closed-loop
control unit
● Display and operator panel
● SIMATIC S7
● SINAMICS DCM Control Module
perform a system startup. After the system startup, the readiness of the voltage regulator is
checked in the SIMATIC S7.
The following conditions are necessary for switching on the exciter or voltage regulator:
● Generator is not connected to the power network
● Short-circuit device of generator is open
● Turbine speed more than 90% of rated speed
● No external Safety OFF (generator protection)
● No internal Safety OFF (exciter system) present
Depending on the selected operating mode, the excitation system can be switched on from
the instrumentation and control system or the display and operator panel and setpoints
entered.

8.7 Switching off the static excitation system

See also the 100 to 106 function diagrams in the THYRIPOL open-loop control list manual.
The switch-off logic is controlled in the SIMATIC S7 software.
The exciter can be switched off by:
● Normal switch off by the instrumentation and control or locally on the display and operator
panel
● External Safety OFF (generator protection)
● Internal Safety OFF (exciter system)
The normal switch off is possible with the "Excitation OFF" command provided the generator
is not under load, i.e. neither connected to the supply system nor running as auxiliaries
service.
For the normal switch off, the firing pulse request is revoked while a monitoring time of 10
seconds is running in parallel. The circuit-breaker is opened when the channel-specific
"Firing pulse locked" feedback is performed or the monitoring time has expired. After the

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 172
 Operation
8.8 Initial excitation (optionally available)

switch off, a restart lock remains for 15 seconds. After expiration of the restart lock, the
excitation is ready for switch on again provided no fault is pending.
For an external Safety OFF, inverter operation starts immediately and the shutdown
sequence is processed. This shutdown sequence setting is independent of the generator
circuit-breaker position.
For an internal Safety OFF (Safety OFF for excitation), a message is sent to the safety
system. An external Safety OFF is expected within two seconds so that the shutdown
sequence is performed. After two seconds, irrespective of the generator circuit-breaker
position, the shutdown sequence is processed.
If, when disconnecting the feeding grid, the main infeed is faulted, then the SES control fires
the DC overvoltage protection, the DC converter pulses are canceled and the excitation
circuit breaker is opened. The field current decays in free-wheeling via the field discharge
resistor.

8.8 Initial excitation (optionally available)

See also the 110 function diagram in the THYRIPOL open-loop control list manual.
This option is used if a self-excitation for the generator is required. The static excitation
system is powered from the generator terminals.
Schematic diagram:

Figure 8-42 Initial excitation (overview)

General method of operation

The main circuit of the excitation system is powered from the generator terminals or from the
generator leads between the generator and the generator circuit breaker.
The field winding of the generator is powered from the initial excitation circuit until the

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 173
Operation
8.8 Initial excitation (optionally available)

necessary voltage is present at the main power converter. From this time on, the system
starts autonomously. The auxiliary power supply of the "DC initial excitation from the power
plant battery" (option L90-L94) and the "AC initial excitation from the auxiliaries power
supply" (option L95-L99) are protected with the appropriate switching device on the input
side. The state of this switching device is detected and signaled.
The output of the initial excitation must be protected with respect to the main circuit of the
excitation system by means of fuses. These fuses and the input voltage of the initial
excitation are thus monitored and signaled indirectly using a time monitoring function.
The initial excitation is available for three sizes with the following input currents:

Size Input current DC [A] Input current 3-phase AC [A]

1 (L90, L91, L95, L96) 50 <5
2 (L92, L93, L97, L98) 80 <8
3 (L94, L99) 150 < 15

Processing sequence of the DC initial excitation from the power plant battery (option L90 - L94)
The processing sequence of the DC initial excitation is automatic. On the excitation ON
signal, the controller of the excitation system performs the following steps:
1. The line-side circuit breaker is closed. The main power converter receives the operation
release. The control set trips all valves of the power converter until the minimum
synchronization voltage is attained. This means that the power converter acts like a diode
rectifier during initial excitation until the minimum synchronization has been reached.
After attaining the minimum synchronization voltage, the main power converter acts
controlled. In some situations, provided the rotor residual remanence of the generator is
sufficiently large, the system starts independently.
2. The line-side DC contactor (.HK-K02) and the output-side DC contactor (.HK-K03) are
operated and initial excitation starts.
3. After the minimum synchronization voltage has been reached, the initial excitation circuit
is switched off by opening the DC contactor (.HK-K03) and then the DC contactor (.HK-
K02). The current controller of the main power converter intervenes after shutdown of the
initial excitation circuit and works under open-loop / closed-loop control from this moment
on.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

174 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.9 Test switch (optionally available)

AC initial excitation from auxiliaries service (option L95 - L99) sequence

The processing sequence of the AC initial excitation is automatic. On the excitation ON
signal, the controller of the excitation system performs the following steps:
1. The line-side circuit breaker is closed. The main power converter receives the operation
release. The control set trips all valves of the power converter until the minimum
synchronization voltage is attained. This means that the power converter acts like a diode
rectifier during initial excitation until the minimum synchronization has been reached.
After attaining the minimum synchronization voltage, the main power converter acts
controlled. In some situations, provided the rotor residual remanence of the generator is
sufficiently large, the system starts independently.
2. The input-side AC contactor (.HK-K01) and the output-side DC contactor (.HK-K03) are
operated and initial excitation starts.
3. After the minimum synchronization voltage has been reached, the initial excitation circuit
is switched off by opening the DC contactor (.HK-K03) and then the AC contactor (.HK-
K01). The current controller of the main power converter intervenes after shutdown of the
initial excitation circuit and works under open-loop / closed-loop control from this moment
on.

Note
The output of the initial excitation must be protected with respect to the main circuit of the
excitation system by means of fuses. These fuses and the input voltages of the initial
excitation are monitored and signaled indirectly using a time monitoring.

WARNING
Note the safety information
The warning notes of Chapter 2, must be observed when these fuses are checked or
replaced.

8.9 Test switch (optionally available)

WARNING
Important note
During the test, ensure that the closed-loop control does not act on the real system.
Failure to observe this can cause death, severe injury or material damage.

The test switch is used to check the limits set in the exciter system. For this purpose, the
exciter system or the closed-loop control channel must not affect the real system (generator).
This status must be established and ensured by the testing personnel.
The test switch is located on the rear door of the control cabinet and allows the stator sizes
of the generator to be fed from a simulation device.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 175
Operation
8.10 Transverse start (optionally available)

The test switch disconnects the internal generator actual value acquisition from the main
converters of the generator. It disconnects the voltage converters and the power converters.
Test switches of the FMS14 series from STATES Corp. or FT-1 from ABB (Westinghouse)
Corp. are deployed. They can be contacted with standard spring clips, see figure.

Figure 8-43 Test switch

Table 8- 4 Test switch

Signal Range Test socket Note

Generator voltage L1 0 … 100 V 1 -
Generator voltage L2 0 … 110 V 2 -
Generator voltage L3 0 … 120 V 3 -
Generator voltage N 4 -
Generator current L1 0…1 A 5 -
Generator current L2 0…5 A 7 -
Generator current L3 9 -
Generator current N 10 -
Common potential max. 24 V 11 -
Overexcitation limitation 12 Potential-free contact, 11-12
Underexcitation limitation 13 Potential-free contact, 11-13
U/f limitation 14 Potential-free contact, 11-14

8.10 Transverse start (optionally available)

The traverse starting function permits gas turbine-generators to be started with the starting
frequency converter (SFC) of another gas turbine-generator. The gas turbine-generators do
not have to be adjacent. Up to 6 starting frequency converters are connected to the
generators of 6 gas turbines via a starting busbar so that every starting frequency converter
can start every gas turbine-generator. Every starting frequency converter can work together
with the excitation system (SES) of every gas turbine-generator to operate a generator, see
the following figures.
The output side of each starting frequency converter is connected to the starting busbar via
one internal disconnector each (AnfUmr int Trn / SFC INT ISOLATOR). This is installed on
the machine power converter of the starting frequency converter to isolate the starting
frequency converter from the return voltages of other starting frequency converters. The
starting busbar is connected to the stator windings of the generators via external
disconnectors (AnfUmr ext Trn / SFC EXT ISOLATOR). These isolate the starting busbar
and the starting frequency converters from the stators when the gas turbine-generators are
running in generator operation, in which the operating voltage of the starting frequency
converters is exceeded. Operation of the internal disconnector is monitored by the

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

176 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.10 Transverse start (optionally available)

THYRIPOL system of the selected SFC; operation of the external disconnector is monitored
via the THYRIPOL system of the selected SES.
The starting busbar is divided into individual segments in accordance with the number of
starting frequency converters by bus sectionalizers (AnfUmr Umsch Trenner / SFC C/O
ISOLATOR). These permit simultaneous starting of gas turbine-generators with the starting
frequency converters in each segment. The bus sectionalizers are controlled and monitored
by the I&C of each gas turbine-generator. The I&C signals the position "IS ON" of all bus
sectionalizers of a starting busbar to all THYRIPOL systems involved and thus determines
the assignment of SFC and SES during transverse starting.
A dedicated communications connection between the THYRIPOL systems is provided for the
"Transverse start" function. To increase availability, communication over all channels of all
THYRIPOL systems is made as a ring. This means that interruption of a communication
cable does not cause failure of the "transverse start" function, but rather ring switchover is
performed to maintain communication.

Transverse start assignment SFC and SES

The position of the bus sectionalizer is evaluated by all excitation systems of the starting
busbar. If all segments of the starting busbar are electrically interconnected via closed bus
sectionalizers, the THYRIPOL systems are involved in transverse starting operation on the
connected starting busbar. They respond in accordance with the position in the sequence of
the starting busbar. The starting frequency converter and THYRIPOL systems at the ends of
the starting busbar can be used for transverse starting. THYRIPOL systems in the central
position of the starting busbar respond passively and do not permit SFC operation. They
therefore make their sub-segment of the starting busbar available for transverse starting.

Preparing and switching on SFC

If the bus sectionalizers are closed accordingly, the THYRIPOL system of the selected SES
can operate its own gas turbine-generator with another SFC. For this purpose, the I&C
sends the "Prepare SFC" command to the THYRIPOL system of the selected SES. This
closes its external disconnector to the generator and requests the selected SFC to close its
internal disconnection. This switches the SFC output through to the generator. If the
disconnectors have been closed and operation of the SES has been prepared, the SES
signals "SFC is prepared" to the I&C. At the same time, all other SES in the connected
segment of the starting busbar send the "SFC blocked" signal to their I&C so that no further
SFC can be switched on.
After this, the I&C can specify the mode for the SFC to the SES and the SFC can be
switched on. The SFC follows the associated sequence stored for the operating mode for
accelerating the gas turbine-generator to various speeds.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 177
Switch off SFC, new selection and protection off
If operation is terminated in accordance with the selected SFC mode, the SES switches the
assigned SFC off again. The internal disconnector is opened by the SFC again and the SED
opens the external disconnector. If these disconnectors are opened again, the bus
sectionalizers can be opened again and the new selection can be made to start another gas
turbine-generator.
A command for the electrical generator protection to the SES operating in SFC operation
causes the immediate shutdown of the SES and the SFC controlled by it. On shutdown due
to a fault, the SFC does not send a protection trip request to the SES physically assigned to
it so that it remains in operation with its generator undisturbed. The fault of the SFC only
results in shutdown of itself and of the THYRIPOL system of the selected SES.

Figure 8-44 Schematic representation of six THYRIPOL compact units for transverse starting (1)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 178
 Operation
8.11 Current symmetry control

Figure 8-45 Schematic representation of six THYRIPOL compact units for transverse starting (2) (continuation)

8.11 Current symmetry control

See also the function diagrams 6862 and 6863 in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control list
manual.
The current symmetry control permits the efficient use of the power converter of the power
section.
Because of possible tolerance chains and different component behavior, the busbar
mountings of the power section can cause asymmetry between the power converters. The
symmetry control detects any asymmetry and minimizes it separately controlling the
converters.
The maximum asymmetry of the DC converters is 1% of the rated converter current.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 179
8.12 Free function blocks for the voltage controller
See also function diagrams 7312 to 7346 in the THYRIPOL closed-loop control List Manual.
The free function blocks are used for the system-specific adaptation using the appropriate
parameter interconnections.
The logic blocks are described in the function diagrams of the THYRIPOL closed-loop
control List Manual from FP7312.
Using the runtime group, the cycle time is defined in ms for the free block (1 = 1 ms, 2 =
2 ms, 4 =4 ms, …). The required sequence in which the free block is executed can be
defined using the run sequence. Blocks with a lower number are executed before blocks with
a higher number. The run sequence always refers to blocks in the same runtime group.
The following diagram shows an example of using a free block. The inputs of the free block
are connected to the appropriate signal sources using BICO technology. The runtime group
was set to 1 = 1 ms. If several free blocks are used, the run sequence should be set
corresponding to how the blocks should be calculated.

Figure 8-46 Free function blocks for the voltage controller

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 180
 Operation
8.13 Communication

8.13 Communication

8.13.1 Communication to the instrumentation and control

8.13.1.1 Communication via PROFIBUS DP

The communication with the higher-level process instrumentation and control is performed
redundant via PROFIBUS DP for both the single channel and the dual-channel variant of the
open- and closed-loop control.
The data volume and its significance are described in the THYRIPOL Control List Manual.
Any change of the data volume or its significance must be agreed between the customer and
Siemens.
The communication with the starting frequency converter for a compact unit is performed via
an internal signal exchange between the excitation system and the starting frequency
converter.
Above a certain length that depends on the baudrate, optic fibers rather than the PROFIBUS
cable must be used for connecting the communications partners. For this purpose, Optical
Link Modules (OLM) are used in the control cubicle. A monitored 24 VDC supply power is
used for the supply.
A failure of the communication between the active channel and the starting frequency
converter causes termination of the starting mode. The starting mode is also terminated if a
fault occurs in the communication to the instrumentation and control or in the active channel.
For pure exciter operation, a fault in the communication to the starting frequency converter or
in the starting frequency converter itself does not impair the operation.

8.13.1.2 Communication via Modbus TCP (optionally available)

The communication with the higher-level process instrumentation and control is performed
redundantly via Modbus TCP for both the single channel and the dual-channel variant of the
open- and closed-loop control.
The data volume and its significance is described in the system-specific customer
documents. Any change of the data volume or its significance must be agreed between the
customer and Siemens.
The communication with the starting frequency converter for a compact unit is performed via
internal signal exchange between the excitation system and the starting frequency converter.
The length of the connection to the next switch must not exceed 100 m. The cable length
between the switches depends on the deployed switches and the transmission medium.
A failure of the communication between the active channel and the starting frequency
converter causes termination of the starting mode. The starting mode is also terminated if a
fault occurs in the communication to the instrumentation and control or in the active channel.
For pure exciter operation, a fault in the communication to the starting frequency converter or
in the starting frequency converter itself does not impair the operation.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 181
Operation
8.13 Communication

8.13.1.3 Communication via the hardware connection (optionally available)

The connection of the system to the higher-level process instrumentation and control is
made via digital and analog input/output modules located in the control cubicle. The
additional modules are implemented as an additional ET200 station.

Digital signals
The digital input/output signals are isolated in the excitation system using optocouplers and
coupling relays. The excitation system provides the signal voltage for the input signals. The
output signals are output via two potential-free changeover contacts per signal. The signal
voltage must be provided externally, see following figure:

Figure 8-47 Digital input, digital output

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

182 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Table 8- 5 Technical specifications

Coupling relays
Contact variant 2 CO contact
Contact material AgNi
Maximum switching voltage 250 VAC/VDC
Minimum switching voltage 5 VAC/VDC (at 10 mA)
Maximum switch-on current 15 A (300 ms)
Minimum switch-on current 10 mA (at 5 V)
Limit continuous current 6A
Maximum shutdown power (ohmic load) 140 W (at 24 VDC)
85 W (at 48 VDC)
60 W (at 60 VDC)
44 W (at 110 VDC)
60 W (at 220 VDC)
1500 VA (at 250 VAC)
Switching capacity in accordance with 2 A (at 24 V, DC13)
DIN VDE 0660 / IEC 60947 0.2 A (at 250 V, DC13)
3 A (at 24 V, AC15)
3 A (at 120 V, AC15)
3 A (at 250 V, AC15)
Optocoupler
Input rated voltage Urated 24 VDC (option G96)
48 VDC (option G97)
110 VDC (option G98 + C11)
125 VDC (option G98 + C12)
220 VDC (option G98 + C22)
250 VDC (option G98 + C25)
Input voltage range based on Urated 0.8 ... 1.1
Switching threshold "0" signal based on Urated ≤ 0.3
Switching threshold "1" signal based on Urated ≥ 0.8
Typical input current at Urated 3 mA ... 9 mA
Typical switch-on time 20 µs to 6 ms (at Urated)
Typical switch-off time 300 µs to 3 ms (at Urated)
Operational voltage display Yellow LED

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 183
Operation
8.13 Communication

Depending on the system configuration, different input signal voltages can be processed:

Table 8- 6 Input signal voltages

Option code Option designation Signal voltage

G96 Instrumentation and control coupling - hardwired - 24 VDC
signal voltage 24 VDC
G97 Instrumentation and control coupling - hardwired - 48 VDC
signal voltage 48 VDC
G98 Instrumentation and control coupling - hardwired - 110 VDC (option C11)
signal voltage = DC auxiliary voltage supply 125 VDC (option C12)
220 VDC (option C22)
250 VDC (option C25)

Analog signals
Analog signals are forwarded via the isolation amplifier potential-isolated to the analog
modules. The output of the isolation amplifiers is adjustable and can provide the following
signal levels:
● 0 ... 20 mA
● 4 ... 20 mA
● 0 ... 10 V

Signal scope
The signal scope for each option is contained in the following table:

Table 8- 7 Signal scope

Option Signal Input (I)

Output (O)
G90 Excitation Off command I
Excitation On command I
Manual voltage controller command I
Automatic voltage controller command I
Increase setpoint I
Decrease setpoint I
Zero reactive power command I
Turbine speed larger than 90% I
Excitation initiation O
Excitation alarm O
Excitation blocked O
Excitation Off O
Excitation On O
Local control O

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

184 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Operation
8.13 Communication

Manual voltage controller O

Automatic voltage controller O
Generator load limit active O
Underexcitation limiting active O
Overexcitation limiting active O
Generator voltage larger than 90% O
Excitation current actual value of the active channel (analog) O
Excitation current setpoint feedback (analog) O
Generator voltage setpoint feedback (analog) O
G91 SFC start release I
SFC normal start command I
SFC washing command I
SFC boiler ventilating command I
SFC prepare command I
SFC Off command I
SFC On command I
SFC alarm O
SFC blocked O
SFC normal start selected O
SFC washing selected O
SFC boiler ventilating selected O
SFC prepared O
SFC On O
SFC Off O
Own SFC ready O
G92 Power factor control On command I
Power factor control Off command I
Power factor control On O
Power factor control setpoint (analog) O
G93 Reactive power control On command I
Reactive power control Off command I
Reactive power control On O
Reactive power control setpoint (analog) O
G94 PSS On command I
PSS Off command I
PSS On O
PSS active O
G95 Excitation current setpoint (analog) I
Generator voltage setpoint (analog) I
Power factor setpoint (analog) I
Reactive power setpoint (analog) I

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 185
 The communication with the starting frequency converter for a compact unit is performed via
internal signal exchange between the excitation system and the starting frequency converter.
A failure of the communication between the active channel and the starting frequency
converter causes termination of the starting mode.
For pure exciter operation, a fault in the communication to the starting frequency converter or
in the starting frequency converter itself does not impair the operation.

8.14 Alarm, error and system messages

8.14.1 Basic principles

The system differentiates between three types of messages:
● System messages
System messages indicate a specific operating state of the system or signal certain
events, which, however, do not have a fault as cause.
● Alarm messages (also called alarms)
Alarm messages record faults in the system that are not classified as being critical. An
alarm in the system is signaled to the instrumentation and control. The message is
cleared once the cause for the alarm has been rectified.
● Fault messages (also called faults)
Fault messages record critical faults in the system. Faults in an open- and closed-loop
control channel normally cause a channel switching (for details, see Chapter Execution
variants of the open-loop/closed-loop channel (Page 169)). If a fault occurs in the system,
it is signaled to the instrumentation and control. Faults must be acknowledged. The fault
message can be acknowledged locally on the display and operator panel only when the
cause of a fault has been rectified.
If the open- and closed-loop control channel is not redundant, a fault causes a safety
shutdown of the system.

8.14.2 List Manuals

The THYRIPOL open- and closed-loop control list manuals contain all parameters and
message lists with all possible alarms and faults of the system. The functions of the static
excitation system are shown in the Chapter Function diagrams. The parameter lists, the
function diagrams and the message list make it easy to understand the functions of the
excitation system, support commissioning and allow faults to be analyzed (troubleshooting).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 186
Maintenance 9
This Service Manual includes safety information and instructions for the proper execution of
service work on static excitation systems.
The manuals and documentation of the individual devices or parts must also be used when
any work is performed.
Maintenance and servicing may only be performed by personnel specially trained for this
purpose.

Technical Support
Should you require support, contact our Customer Support, for contacts, see Chapter
Service & Support (Page 241).

9.1 Term
Maintenance
"Combination of all technical and administrative measures and management measures
during the life cycle of a unit under consideration in order to maintain or return to the
functional status, so that the required function can be fulfilled."
"Servicing can be subdivided into the following discrete basic activities: maintenance,
inspection, repair, improvement, and weakpoint analysis."

Inspection
"Actions for determining and evaluating the actual condition of a unit, including the
determination of causes of wear and identification of necessary consequences of continued
use."

Maintenance
"Measures for delaying depletion of the available wear reserve."

Corrective maintenance
"Measures for returning a unit to its functional status, with the exception of improvements."

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 187
Maintenance
9.2 Important safety instructions

9.2 Important safety instructions

Note
The safety notices described here refer to all activities described in Section Maintenance
(Page 187).

WARNING
Observe the national regulations
When performing service and maintenance work, observe the appropriate national
regulations, see EN 50110-1, Operation of electrical installations. The system operator is
responsible for this work.

Observing the five safety rules

The following safety instructions as well as the instructions provided in the documentation for
the individual components must be followed without exception for your own personal safety
and to avoid property damage.
1. Isolate (the system must be isolated for all possible sources of electrical power)
2. Secure against reconnection
3. Verify absence of operating voltage
4. Ground and short-circuit, see Section Grounding the system (Page 191)
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts
After completing the work, proceed in the reverse order.

Live-line working
The replacement of cabinet components (e.g. open-loop control components, fans, power
sections) in installations that are in operation is classified as "live working", see EN 50110-1,
Operation of Electrical Installations.
Live-line working demands specially trained personnel (electricians trained in live-line
working), special materials (insulated tools, personal protective equipment) and special
organizational measures (live-line working is also subject to the instruction in writing of the
responsible electricians).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

188 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.2 Important safety instructions

Safety rules for repair work

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
After the static excitation system has been shut down, and as long as the generator is still
rotating, hazardous voltages exceeding 50 V AC and 120 V DC can be present in the
system. These voltages may result in death, serious injury, or significant property damage.

CAUTION
Non-approved spare parts
Third-party spare parts and unapproved spare parts may possibly not meet the
requirements of the manufacturer.
The use of third-party spare parts can impair the system function and result in injury and
material damage.
Use only spare parts approved by the manufacturer.

Note
Data loss
The shutdown of the control cubicle causes data loss for messages (fault, alarm and system
message).
Back up important data before the excitation system and/or the control cubicle is
deenergized.

Note
Maintenance intervals
Strictly observe the prescribed maintenance intervals, as well as the instructions for repair
and replacement of components.
See Chapter Inspection and maintenance (Page 193) and Corrective maintenance
(Page 200).

Note
If option X25, "Repair capability during operation", has been selected, it can be used for
repair or servicing. For further information about repairing THYRIPOL power sections, see
Corrective maintenance (Page 200)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 189
Maintenance
9.2 Important safety instructions

DANGER
Remaining danger after shutdown of the infeed
After the main infeed of the excitation system has been shut down (3WL circuit breaker),
voltage can still be present at the cables marked with a "lightning" symbol, which are
powered from an external power source.
This affects
• AC connection busbars in front of the 3WL circuit breaker
• Fan supply: .HC-F01 to .HC-F06
• DC battery voltage: .BX-X01:1-2, .BX-X02:1-2 and the following circuit according to the
circuit diagram
• 1AC auxiliary power supply: .GX-X01:85-90 heating, lighting, socket outlet, optional
control cubicle fans and the following circuit according to the circuit diagram
• 3AC auxiliary power supply: .HX-X02:1-3 and the following circuit according to the circuit
diagram
System-specific and because of options, additional circuits can be live. Further information
about the infeeds can be obtained from the type plate, the cycle component connection
diagram and the circuit manual.

Discharge

WARNING
Capacitor discharge / dangerous voltages
After the line voltage has been disconnected, voltages are still present at the static
excitation system. These voltages can result in death or serious injury.
After you have switched off the power supply, observe the discharge time of the TSE
suppressor capacitors of 5 minutes before you perform any maintenance work or repair
work and do not touch the device during this period.
Measure the voltage once the discharge time has elapsed before starting work (measured
value ≤ 60 VDC).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

190 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.3 Grounding the system

9.3 Grounding the system

WARNING
Grounding the plant
After the system has been shut down, high voltages can still be present at the starting
frequency converter. These can result in death or severe injury.
The voltage-free condition must be verified using a suitable high-voltage meter. The
grounding equipment can then be connected.
Work on the power sections is permitted only for a grounded system.
More detailed information on the repair capability of THYRIPOL power sections: Chapter
Corrective maintenance (Page 200)
Fan replacement: Chapter Fans in the power section cabinet module (Page 201)
To ensure safe working on live parts of high-voltage equipment, appropriate grounding
equipment (ground switch) must be provided. The grounding equipment must meet the
requirements of IEC 62271-102 or IEC 61230. Prior to access to the equipment, the ground
contacts or a display that the contacts of the ground switch are closed must be visible for
the servicing personnel.
Excitation system
For excitation systems (rated voltage under 1 kV), the appropriate grounding equipment
(e.g. grounding switch / short-circuit device) must be present in the plant or in the high-
voltage supply.
For safety reasons, however, the system owner is provided with a way, even within the
excitation systems, to ground and short-circuit a part of the installation using grounding and
short-circuit equipment (grounding accessories) in the relevant working zone. For excitation
systems, this grounding equipment is only for protective potential equalization in the
working zone, and is not designed to conduct short-circuits.
Starting frequency converter (for compact units)
Unlike standard EN 61800-5-1 (IEC 61800-5-1), the starting frequency converter (rated
voltage greater than 1 kV) is not equipped with a grounding switch. Grounding terminals are
provided in the line- and motor-side connection areas where the associated live parts
(phases of the power sections) can be grounded and short-circuited using grounding and
short-circuit equipment (grounding accessories).
During maintenance work, ensure that the starting frequency converter / static excitation
system are grounded sufficiently when the doors of the power section are open.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 191
Maintenance
9.4 Opening the cabinet doors

9.4 Opening the cabinet doors

WARNING
High short-circuit currents
It is only permissible to operate the system with the cabinet doors closed. If servicing is
required, observe the safety regulations in accordance with EN 50110-1 and the
appropriate national regulations.
Failure to do so can result in material damage, serious injury or death.

The cabinet doors of the power section cabinets, the excitation system, the control cubicle
and the starting frequency converter (for compact units) are equipped with door limit
switches.

Excitation system
As standard, when a door of the excitation system is opened, an alarm is output; however,
the excitation system is not shut down. This alarm is displayed on the operator panel of the
excitation system. An appropriate alarm signal is made available to the instrumentation and
control.

Figure 9-1 Door limit switch

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

192 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Starting frequency converter (for compact units)
The cabinet doors of the starting frequency converter are equipped with door limit switches
or magnetic door lock (for version with louvered doors). The opening of a starting frequency
converter cabinet door causes the shutdown of the primary-side circuit breaker for the
starting frequency converter and the shutdown of the starting frequency converter.
Because of rated voltages >1 kV at live parts, the doors and the protective covers of the
starting frequency converter power sections may also be screwed on.
Detailed information about the opening of doors and protective covers of the starting
frequency converter is contained in the operating instructions of the starting frequency
converter.

9.5 Inspection and maintenance

Additional documents required

Links to the descriptions and operating instructions of the deployed components are
contained in the appendix in Chapter Deployed components (Page 293).

Inspection and maintenance schedule

Inspections and maintenance should be carried out based on a schedule that meets the
needs of the special environmental conditions at the location of use.
Use the following table as basis for creating an inspection and maintenance schedule
customized to the special environmental conditions at the location of use.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 193
Table 9- 1 Inspection and maintenance schedule

Inspection and Carried out by Frequency Remarks

maintenance work
Checking the cooling air system Plant operators Monthly / as re- If there is a reduced airflow, the filter
quired mats must be cleaned or replaced at
appropriate intervals.
As required Check and clean the screen of the
fans (if present).
Annually / as re- Check the fan (state) and operating
quired hours,
see Chapter
Operating hours counter (Page 141).
Preventive replacement, see Chapter
Storage and replacement of the fans
(Page 201).
Check the cabinet heating Plant operators Annually Check the temperature switches and
heating system; clean, if
required.
Exterior cleaning of the cabinets Plant operators As required Visual inspection, clean
if required
Clean the interior of the cabinets Owner / Siemens Annually / as re- Visual inspection, clean
Service quired if required
Insulating clearances Siemens service After 1 year, then Slight, dry, non-conducting contamina-
recommend every 1 to 4 years tion is permitted.
depending on the Contamination caused by dust in
degree of contami- conjunction with high relative humidity
nation must be removed. In particular, the
surfaces of the ceramic semiconduc-
tors, the
insulation supports and insulation
laminate separators of the low-
inductance busbar packages must be
clean and dry.
Check the electrical connections (ex- Plant operators After 1 year, and Observing the 5
ternal power and control connections) every 4 years safety rules
thereafter Firm seating and status of the
screw connections, tension relief and
shielding,
Tightening torques, see Chapter Tor-
ques for screw connections (Page 80)
Check the measuring circuits, includ- Siemens service Every two years Create logs of measurements.
ing signal processing (actual value personnel
acquisition)
Check the replacement parts Owner / Siemens Annually / as re- Check for completeness and state,
Service quired and
procure any missing components.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 194
 Maintenance
9.5 Inspection and maintenance

WARNING
State of the insulation materials
Any insulation materials used for insulating active parts that exhibit surface damage must
not continue to be used, regardless of whether the damage has an electrical or mechanical
cause.
The repair of damaged insulation material is not permitted.

NOTICE
Visual inspection notes
Dirt and pollution can damage the system.
• Perform visual inspections for contamination every six months.
• Make sure that you take into account the specified ambient conditions.
• Depending on the ambient conditions, visual inspections may have to be carried out
more frequently.

9.5.1 Inspection of the cooling air system

Excitation system
Two fans are installed below the power converters. Each fan alone can supply the required
cooling capacity for the power converter (redundancy). The cooling air for the power
converters is drawn in from the front through the ventilation grilles in the cabinet doors. The
air heated by the power converters is discharged through the roof of the power section
cabinet into the environment.
Make sure that the supplied air is free of dust or any other electrically conductive material.
Avoid environmental conditions that could cause condensation and significant dust
accumulation.
Check the tightness of the base plates. Air tightness in the area of the power cable entries is
essential for the cooling system of the power converters to function correctly.

Starting frequency converter

Detailed information concerning the inspection of the cooling air system of the starting
frequency converter is contained in the operating instructions of the starting frequency
converter (SINAMICS GL 150 AC medium-voltage converter equipment manual, air cooled
variant, power section, A5E01098517B).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 195
Maintenance
9.5 Inspection and maintenance

9.5.2 Checking the service life of the fans

To ensure the safe operation of the system, the fans should be replaced as preventative
measure in accordance with the service life details.
The operating hours of the individual fans can be read out at the operator panel on the door
of the control cubicle.
The operating hours must be recorded in the maintenance log each time inspection or
maintenance work is performed.
After the fan replacement, the operating hours counters of the fans must be reset.
See also Chapter Operating hours counter (Page 141).
See also Chapter Storage and replacement of the fans (Page 201).

Table 9- 2 Service life of the fans

Fan Service life

Excitation system power cabinet fans Approximately 30000 operating hours or a service life of approxi-
mately six years
Roof-mounted starting frequency converter power Approximately 30000 operating hours or a service life of approxi-
cabinets and reactor cabinet mately six years
Roof-mounted fans of the excitation system Approximately 38000 operating hours for an ambient temperature
between 40° C and 45° C
Or approximately five years service life
Note: The roof fan operating hours are not monitored or
counted in the control.

9.5.3 Check the screwed fastenings

The screw connections must be checked in intervals as specified in the inspection and
maintenance schedule, see Chapter Inspection and maintenance (Page 193)
Torques, see Table 5-1 Tightening torques for screw connections, strength class 8
(Page 80).

9.5.4 Cleaning

Contact for cleaning measures

If heavy contamination occurs, contact the Customer Support. For contact details, see
Chapter Service & Support (Page 241)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

196 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Removing dust deposits
Dust deposits inside the cabinets must be removed at regular intervals (at least once a year)
by qualified personnel in compliance with the applicable safety regulations.
The dust must be removed using a brush and vacuum cleaner and using dry compressed air
(max. 1 bar) in inaccessible areas.

Ventilation
To ensure the correct operation of the fans, keep the ventilation slits of the cabinet systems
free.

Note
The actual required maintenance intervals depend on the installation and operating
conditions (cabinet vicinity).
Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further details,
contact your regional office or sales office.

Cleaning agent for external frame parts

All external parts of the frame structure should be wiped with a clean dry non-linting cloth.
During this process, make sure that you do not simply distribute the dirt, but remove it by
constantly changing the wiping surface of the cloth.
In the case of heavy contamination, a cloth soaked with ethyl alcohol (non-dripping) can be
used for cleaning. Also in this case, change the cloth frequently to avoid spreading the dirt.

Note
You must never clean fiber-optic cables or fiber-optic cable bundles with a damp cloth. In the
case of dust accumulation, the dust should be removed with a dry, non-linting cloth.

Cleaning agent for aluminum parts

The surface of untreated aluminum is always covered by a thin but dense oxide skin. The
affinity of aluminum to oxygen is sufficiently strong that if the oxide skin is scratched, the
metal reacts immediately with atmospheric oxygen causing a new oxide skin to form. This
natural oxide layer acts as surface protection and is the reason for the good weathering
resistance of aluminum materials.
In most cases, this means that additional protective measures are superfluous.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 197
Maintenance
9.5 Inspection and maintenance

Very greasy deposits can be removed with ethyl alcohol. If there is other heavy soiling, it
may be necessary to use fiber or plastic brushes.

Note
Unsuitable cleaning agents for aluminum
Any strongly alkaline chemicals such as caustic potash or soda as well as acids corrode the
aluminum and roughen the surface. The agents often recommended for cleaning glass also
exhibit this effect and must therefore not be used on aluminum.
The same applies to cleaning cloths and brushes which have already been used for cleaning
copper, brass, bronze or other heavy metals, because this might transfer metallic impurities
onto the aluminum that promote corrosion.
Brass, bronze or steel-wire brushes as well as copper-woven cloths and steel wool must not
be used.

Cleaning the filter mats in the cabinet doors of the excitation system
The filter mat of a cabinet is mounted on the inner side of the louvered metal plate. To
replace the filter mat of a cabinet door, remove the screw connections of the louvered metal
plate on the outer side of the cabinet door. The louvered metal plate can then be opened and
the filter mat removed or replaced, see the following figure:

Figure 9-2 Open louvered metal plate

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

198 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

For filter mat types, see the electrical bill of materials.

WARNING
Open cabinet doors
It is only permissible to operate the system with the cabinet doors closed. If servicing or
maintenance is required, observe the safety regulations in accordance with EN 50110-1
and the appropriate national regulations.
Failure to do so can result in material damage, serious injury or death.

NOTICE
Contamination of the system
There is no filter protection for the ventilation system when the excitation system is
operated with open doors or if the louvered metal plates of the cabinets are open.

Cleaning the starting frequency converter

Detailed information for cleaning the starting frequency converter is contained in the
operating instructions of the starting frequency converter.

Spare parts

CAUTION
Non-approved spare parts
Third-party spare parts and unapproved spare parts may possibly not meet the
requirements of the manufacturer.
The use of third-party spare parts can impair the system function and result in injury and
material damage.
Use only spare parts approved by the manufacturer.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 199
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

9.6 Corrective maintenance

Note
Fault correction by Siemens service centers
If a fault correction is not possible, inform the Customer Support; for contacts, see Chapter
Service & Support (Page 241).
Have any defective devices or parts repaired only by service centers and repair centers
authorized by Siemens.

In the excitation system, all items marked as spare part can be replaced. The work must be
performed by adequately trained personnel.
Information for repairing the starting frequency converter is contained in the operating
instructions of the starting frequency converter.

Note
Details for returning defective components
Please include the following information when defective components are returned:
• Description of the fault profile
• Operating point, currents and voltages
• Time and date of the failure
• Log file with the fault messages (see Chapter Logbook (Page 146)) or screenshots of the
operator panel
• Installation location
Also specify the associated equipment code.

Safety-relevant inspections

WARNING
Checking the cable insulation
Improperly laid or damaged cables and incorrectly attached cable shieldings can heat up in
places and cause fires or short-circuits wherever they make contact.
Check whether all the cable insulation and shields are intact. Have any obvious insulation
faults or faulty cables repaired only by service centers and repair centers authorized by
Siemens.
Please ensure that a short-circuit cannot occur on the power cables due to failure of the
insulation caused by improper cable installation.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

200 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

9.6.1 Storage and replacement of the fans

Observe the following for the storage of fans:
● The fans must not be stored longer than one year prior to commissioning.
● The bearing grease ages even when the fans are not in operation.
● During storage, the fan impeller must be turned at least once per year.

WARNING
Open cabinet doors
It is only permissible to operate the static excitation system when the cabinet doors are
closed. If servicing is required, observe the safety regulations in accordance with EN
50110-1 and the appropriate national regulations.
Failure to do so can result in material damage, serious injury or death.

9.6.1.1 Fans in the power section cabinet module

Replace the fans timely in order to maintain the availability of the power section.
Typical service life of the device fans, see Table 9-2 Service life of the fans (Page 196). In
practice, however, the service life depends on various quantities (e.g. ambient temperature,
degree of cabinet protection, etc.) and so can deviate from this value.

Note
Fan redundancy
To achieve fan redundancy, different fans ("right" and "left" fans) are installed at various
mounting locations.

Removing a fan
See also the figure below
1. Open the upstream motor circuit breaker (detailed data are provided in the circuit
diagram)
2. Remove the supply cable (plug) ②.
3. Remove the 3 fastening screws ① for the relevant fan
4. Carefully remove the fan.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 201
 NOTICE
Signal cables
When removing, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

CAUTION
Sharp edges
Take care not to cut yourself on the sharp edges inside the cabinet.
Always take the appropriate precautions before touching any components.

Installing a fan
See also the figure below
1. Carefully insert the fan.
2. Fasten the fan with three fastening screws ①; for tightening torque, see Torques for
screw connections (Page 80).
3. Insert the supply cable (plug) ②.
4. Reset the operating hours counter, see Chapter Operating hours counter (Page 141).
5. Close the upstream motor circuit breaker (detailed data are provided in the circuit
diagram)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 202
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Figure 9-3 Replacing a fan

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 203
9.6.1.2 Roof fan (option)
Replace the fans timely in order to maintain the availability of the system.
Typical service life of the device fans, see Table 9-2 Service life of the fans (Page 196). In
practice, however, the service life depends on various quantities (e.g. ambient temperature,
degree of cabinet protection, etc.) and so can deviate from this value.

WARNING
Open cabinet doors
It is only permissible to operate the system with the cabinet doors closed. If servicing is
required, observe the safety regulations in accordance with EN 50110-1 and the
appropriate national regulations.
Failure to do so can result in material damage, serious injury or death.

WARNING
Danger from small parts falling in
Small parts that fall into the roof fans can cause material damage and serious injuries or, in
the case of short-circuits, even death.

NOTICE
Incorrect direction of rotation
An incorrect direction of rotation of the fan can result in inadequate cooling and thus
damage the power section.
When you insert the new fan, make sure that it rotates in the correct direction. This is
shown by a small arrow on the enclosure.

Removing a fan
See also the figure below
1. Remove the roof panel.
Note: Remove only that side of the roof panel on which the fan should be replaced.
Remove the eight M6 screws ① of the roof panel.
2. Remove the supply cable (plug 2×) and the cables from the cable fixing ②.
3. Remove the two M8 hexagonal nuts ③.
4. Carefully remove the fan.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 204
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

CAUTION
Sharp edges
Take care not to cut yourself on the sharp edges inside the cabinet.
Always take the appropriate precautions before touching any components.

Installing a fan
See also the figure below
1. Carefully insert the fan.
2. Fasten the fan with two M8 hexagonal nuts ③. Tightening torque, see Torques for screw
connections (Page 80)
3. Re-attach the supply cable ②.
4. Re-attach the roof panel, fasten with eight M6 screws ① Tightening torque 13 Nm.

Figure 9-4 Replacement of a roof fan for a 600 mm cabinet

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 205
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Figure 9-5 Replacement of a roof fan for a 900 mm cabinet

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

206 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
9.6.2 Replacement of the power converter
Prior to removing the power converter, the following preparations as part of the "five safety
rules" must be made, where the safety-relevant regulations in accordance with EN 50110-1
must be observed:
1. Disconnect completely
The line-side circuit breakers of the main circuit must be deactivated.
Disconnect the fuse-disconnector of the fan transformers.
Isolate the motor circuit breaker of the power section fans.
Switch off the converter’s auxiliary voltage circuits.

Note
This item does not apply to the option "Maintenance during operation of the power
section". Disconnection occurs already when the disconnecting switch is opened.

2. Secure against reconnection

Secure the circuit breaker(s) and all of the safety elements against reconnection by taking
suitable measures.

Note
This item does not apply to the option "Maintenance during operation of the power
section". A protection against switching on again is provided by the keyswitch and the
activation of the circuit breaker .BC-F62.

3. Verify absence of operating voltage

The cover must be removed in accordance with configuration step 1 (see following page).
Use a suitable instrument to perform an alternating-current measurement at the specified
measuring points and thus ensure that the equipment is de-energized.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 207
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

4. Ground and short-circuit

Only a "grounding for work" (not short-circuit proof) is possible directly on the system.
This "grounding for work" serves only as additional protection potential compensation that
should prevent the occurrence of dangerous touch voltages at the working location.
The implementation of the grounding and short-circuiting equipment of the main circuit so
that it is short-circuit proof must be ensured on the power plant side (outside the
excitation system), taking into account the maximum short-circuit current that can occur.
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts
If the system is not deactivated on the power plant side, the covers on the connection
panel (IP20) for touch protection must remain installed. We recommend the fitting of an
additional cover to protect against small parts falling in.

Note
The following auxiliary circuits are still live:
• The fan supply (transformers, motor circuit breakers and contactors in the lower area
of the cabinet)
• The cabinet heating
• The cabinet illumination

WARNING
Open cabinet doors
It is only permissible to operate the system with the cabinet doors closed. If servicing is
required, observe the safety regulations in accordance with EN 50110-1 and the
appropriate national regulations.
Failure to do so can result in material damage, serious injury or death.

Note
Heavy weight
The "power converter power section" weighs approximately 160 kg.
Adopt appropriate measures for the replacement, e.g. place the power converter on a
scissor trolley or on a table.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

208 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Removal steps
1. Remove the four M8 screws and the cover.

Figure 9-6 Removing the cover

2. Remove the two M6 screws and the front cover (tilt down by approximately 10° to the
front and remove from below).

Figure 9-7 Removing the power converter cover

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 209
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

3. Remove the two plugs of the temperature sensor cable and the three plugs of the
snubber cable.

Figure 9-8 Removing the cable

4. Tilt the resistance module upwards and remove at the front. Lifting at the rear simplifies
the removal from the guide rail.

Figure 9-9 Snubber resistance module

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

210 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

5. Remove the nine M12 screws of the AC busbars.

Figure 9-10 Removing the screws on the AC busbars

6. Loosen all plugs on the printed circuit board and remove the cables, including the rubber
sleeves, from the housing side panel and the cable guides.

Figure 9-11 Removing the connector

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 211
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

7. Remove the three M6 nuts and the protective cover.

Figure 9-12 Removing the M6 nuts and the protective cover

8. Remove the side M12 screws (two per busbar connection). The removal of the busbars
(two sets of four M12 screws) simplifies access to the side screws.

Figure 9-13 Removing the M12 screws

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

212 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

9. Remove the fastening screws of the power converter (four M8 nuts and three M8 screws).

Figure 9-14 Removing the M8 nuts for the DC connection

Figure 9-15 Removing the M8 nuts for the AC connection

Figure 9-16 Removing the M8 screws for the DC connection

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 213
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

10.Minimum footprint required for setting down is 500 x 500 mm e.g. using an elevating
platform, withdraw the DC converter and set it down in the area prepared.

Figure 9-17 Withdrawing the power converter from the cabinet

Withdraw the power converter. Place the power converter on the placement area
provided in front of the cabinet.
It takes approx. 30-40 minutes to perform the 10 removal steps.

CAUTION
Danger from cut injuries
Take care not to cut yourself on the sharp edges inside the cabinet.
Always take the appropriate precautions before touching any components.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

214 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

NOTICE
Damage to the power converter
Ensure that no signal cables and hoses are damaged when the power converter is
removed.
The placement area provided in front of the cabinet must be adequately stable and must be
secured against movement.

Installation steps
Grease the surfaces on which the power converter is moved.
Installing follows the same steps as removing, but in the reverse order.

NOTICE
Tightening torques
The tightening torques specified in the "Tightening torques for screw connections
(Page 80)" table must be observed.
The screw connections for the protective covers must only be hand tightened.

As supplied by the factory, the power converter is equipped for the U-V-W phase sequence.
For excitation systems that are accessible from two sides, certain DC converters are
retrofitted in the factory for a W-V-U phase sequence. The following figure shows for
orientation and specification which phase sequence is present at the power converter to be
replaced:

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 215
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

① = Front face
Definition: The front face of the cabinet system is that side of the control cubicle on which the
screen is visible.
SR = Power converter (U, V, W)
SR_i = Power converter (W, V, U)
nv

Figure 9-18 Examples: Power converter numbering and orientation of the power converters of the
power section

If the replaced power converter (see figure above, power converter 1 or 2) has phase
sequence W-V-U because of its installation orientation, the current transformer cables on the
assembly unit A7224 must be reconnected in accordance with the following instructions:

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

216 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Current transformer cable U is inserted at module connection XBW.

Current transformer cable W is inserted at module connection XBU.

Figure 9-19 Reconnecting a plug

The power converters are tested at the factory. After the installation, check that the power
converter has not been mechanically damaged and no small parts or tools have fallen inside.
To resume operation of the system, the preparatory measures ("five safety rules") must be
undone in the reverse order.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 217
9.6.3 Repair capability during operation of the power section

General information

Note
The associated Safety notes (Page 15) must be observed.

The "Maintenance during operation of the power section" function permits the disconnection
of a power converter during operation of the THYRIPOL excitation system. This allows a
power converter to be removed from the THYRIPOL excitation system for maintenance or
repair, or to be replaced with a substitute power converter. The "Maintenance during
operation of the power section" function is independent of the "Local" or "Remote" keyswitch
position.
The reasons for isolation of a power converter include:
● A fault of a power converter
● A fault in a power cabinet
● Necessary maintenance work in the power section cabinet, e.g. replacement of a fan.
The principal execution sequence and the individual steps are based on the EN50110-1
standard. The specifications for "Working near live parts" in accordance with the above-
mentioned standard are used.
The power converter is disconnected with a 5-pole disconnecting switch with electrical drive
that disconnects both the AC infeed and the DC output side of the power converter from the
system section in operation.
The following sections describe the structure, the function and the execution of the
"Maintenance during operation of the power section" function.

Note
Whereas the disconnecting switch disconnects a power converter from the remaining system
section, depending on the system configuration, the power section redundancy may not be
available. For a power section redundancy n-2, one power converter can be disconnected
and a power section redundancy still exists.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 218
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Figure 9-20 RIB cabinet and power section cabinet

Note
A detailed dimension drawing is contained in the system-specific documentation.

Note
With regard to safety, the following measures are strongly recommended:
• An external overcurrent/short-circuit release should be integrated in the SES supply cable
(for details, see Notes on plant safety (Page 22))
• A screw and tool checklist should be maintained. This ensures that any deployed tools
and loose screws do not remain in the reinstalled power converter.
• A defective power converter must always be replaced with an identical power converter
that has been subjected to an appropriate routine test.
• The required personal protective equipment must be worn by the executing persons. (The
appropriate (national) standards and regulations must be observed).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 219
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Note
To check the function of the signaling lamps on the MdO cabinets, a lamp test must be
performed from the Admin screen before starting work.
If one or more signaling lamps are defective, replace them with new lamps and test them
again before going ahead with replacing the power converter.

9.6.3.1 Disconnection of a power converter

Selecting the power converter

A fault of the power section is signaled and reported appropriately by the THYRIPOL system
signaling system. The Service menu and the Power Unit submenu show the status of the
power section on the display and operator panel. A power converter with a fault is selected
automatically for the "Maintenance during operation" function. The following figure shows
this case. Power converter 3 signals a fault and so is preselected with the power converter
symbol shown with a yellow background. The selection of the power converter is indicated
with the highlighted representation of the power converter symbol (with a bold border).

Color representations of the power converter symbol:

● Green – power converter in operation
● Yellow – power converter has a fault or is blocked - firing pulses are blocked
● White – power converter not in operation or disconnected

Figure 9-21 Repair capability during operation - power converter 3 selected

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

220 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

If no fault of a power converter is present and/or should maintenance work be performed,

any power converter can be selected. If a power converter fault is present, another power
converter can be selected only for the appropriate additional redundancy of the power
section (n-2).

Blocking the firing pulses of the selected power converter

After the automatic or manual selection of a power converter, its firing pulse can be blocked.
Click the "Block" button to block the firing pulses of the selected power converter.
● If a power converter fails, the power was already taken from the remaining power
converters and the firing pulses already blocked on the affected power converter.
● If a power converter is selected manually, the firing pules are blocked only after clicking
the "Block" button and the power is taken from the remaining power converters.
The "Block" button must always be clicked.
The white signaling lamp on the associated MdO cabinet of the power section cabinet starts
flashing at 0.5 Hz. This indicates on which power section cabinet the firing pulses have been
blocked and on which power section cabinet further steps must be performed. The power
converter symbol on the display and operator panel is shown yellow for a blocked firing
pulse. The fans of the power converter are also switched off when the firing pulses are
blocked.

Note
When the firing pulses of a power converter are blocked, the appropriate messages are
generated and displayed.

Release of the control voltage when the 5-pole disconnecting switch is opened
The flashing white signaling lamp on the associated MdO cabinet indicates the power
section cabinet for which the keyswitch must be turned into the "unlocked" position with the
corresponding key.
The key must be inserted in the keyswitch and turned to the "unlocked" position. The
keyswitch cannot be removed in this position.

Opening the disconnecting switch

Once the control voltage for the disconnecting switch has been released by the keyswitch,
the "Open" button is available for clicking. When the button is clicked, the disconnecting
switch is traversed electrically to the "open" position.
The item of the disconnecting switch is shown in the screen on the display and operator
panel. After isolation of a power converter, the power converter symbol is shown with a white
background.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 221
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Figure 9-22 Maintenance during operation - disconnecting switch on power converter 3 open

Note
If faults occur during this operation, they will be reported appropriately. If a fault prevents
correct opening of the disconnecting switch, e.g. the position of the disconnecting switch is
not signaled correctly, the "Maintenance during operation" function must not be performed
on this power converter and the firing pulses remain blocked. All steps performed so far must
be undone. In this case, this means that the key in the keyswitch must be turned back to the
"locked" position, withdrawn, and kept in a safe place. After this, the block is canceled with
the "Activate" button in accordance with the step "Block firing pulses of the selected power
converter." The white signaling lamp on the associated MdO cabinet stops flashing and goes
out.
Any further messages in the system must be checked. The cause for the malfunction must
be determined and corrected during the next inspection of the THYRIPOL system.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

222 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
9.6.3.2 Protect against reconnection
To ensure that further work can be done safely on the power converter, the following steps
must be performed.

Blocking the control voltage of the disconnecting switch

The keyswitch must be turned with the key to the "locked" position. This blocks the control
voltage of the disconnecting switch and prevents the disconnecting switch from being
switched on again.
The key of the keyswitch is removed in the "locked" position and must be stored at a safe
place.

Figure 9-23 Keyswitch

Disconnecting the supply of the disconnecting switch

The supply of the 5-pole disconnecting switch motors is interrupted with the BC-F62 circuit
breaker in the control cubicle. This is an additional measure to protect against inadvertent
reconnection.
The activation of the BC-F62 circuit breaker causes an appropriate message to be issued
and displayed.

Note
The project-specific location diagram must be observed. It shows the unique position of the
BC-F62 circuit breaker.

When it is steadily lit, the white signaling lamp on the associated MdO cabinet of the
corresponding power section cabinet indicates
● The "Open" position of the disconnecting switch,
● The blocking of the disconnecting switch control voltage, and
● Interruption of the power supply to the disconnecting switch motors.
The door locking of the power section cabinet is released. This is indicated by the green
signaling lamp on the cabinet lock.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 223
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Opening the power section cabinet door

The power section cabinet door can be opened with the door lock. An appropriate message
is output when the power section cabinet door is opened.

Figure 9-24 Signaling lamp

Note
There is one lock under the cylinder cover on each door lock of the power section cabinets.
With the key supplied, the locked doors can be opened when necessary. The cylinder cover
is destroyed when it is removed.
The cylinder covers are not mounted when delivered so that, for commissioning without
power supply of the THYRIPOL system, the power section cabinet doors can be opened with
the supplied key.
The cylinder covers must be attached after the commissioning.

CAUTION
Attaching the cylinder covers
The degree of protection of the cabinet is not ensured without cylinder covers.

9.6.3.3 Replacement of the power converter

The further steps are described in Section Replacement of the power converter (Page 207).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

224 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

9.6.3.4 Completion of the work and resumption of the correct operation

Closing the power section cabinet door

The power section cabinet door can be closed after the correct execution of the previous
items. The message concerning the open cabinet door is cleared from the display and
operator panel.

Release of the control voltage for closing the disconnecting switch

The continuously lit white signaling lamp indicates the power section cabinet for which the
keyswitch must be operated in the "unlocked" position with the appropriate key.
The key must be inserted in the keyswitch of the options cabinet and turned to the
"unlocked" position. This mechanically locks the power section cabinet door and the white
signaling lamp on the associated power section cabinet then starts flashing at 0.5 Hz.

Connecting the supply of the disconnecting switch

The supply of the 5-pole disconnecting switch motors is reconnected with the BC-F62 circuit
breaker in the control cubicle.

Closing the disconnecting switch

The following conditions must be satisfied so that the button for "closing" the disconnecting
switch is available:
● The power section cabinet door must be closed and locked.
● The keyswitch must be in the "unlocked" position.
● The .BC-F62 circuit breaker must be closed.
After clicking the "Close" button, a dialog window opens on the display and operator panel.
The dialog box provides the options of immediate closing or delayed closing of the
disconnecting switch (the cross in the button indicates that "delayed closing" is not selected;
check mark in button indicates that "delayed closing" is selected). The delay time (in ms) is
set project-specifically with the PLC1.28070 parameter in the parameter list.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 225
Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Figure 9-25 Delayed closing of the disconnecting switch

After the disconnecting switch has been successfully closed, the closed position of the
disconnecting switch is shown in the screen on the display and operator panel.
The background color of the power converter symbol on the display and operator panel
changes from white to yellow.

Figure 9-26 Power converter blocked

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

226 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.6 Corrective maintenance

Note
If faults occur during this operation, they will be reported appropriately. If a fault prevents
correct closing of the disconnecting switch, e.g. the position of the switch is not signaled
correctly, the "Maintenance during operation" function must not be completed on this power
converter. All steps performed so far must be undone, i.e. in this case, the control voltage
supply of the disconnecting switch remains connected through the MCB .BC-F62. The key in
the keyswitch must be turned back to the "locked" position, withdrawn, and kept in a safe
place. After this, the block is canceled with the "Activate" button in accordance with the step
"Block firing pulses of the selected power converter." The white signaling lamp on the
associated MdO cabinet stops flashing and goes out.
The cause for the malfunction must be determined and corrected during the next inspection
of the THYRIPOL system.

Blocking the control voltage of the disconnecting switch

The keyswitch must be turned with the key to the "locked" position. This blocks the control
voltage of the disconnecting switch and prevents the disconnecting switch from being
switched off.
The key of the keyswitch is removed in the "locked" position and must be stored at a safe
place.

Firing pulse release of the power converter

Click the "Activate" button to release the firing pulses on the power converter again. The
white signaling lamp is cleared on the associated power section cabinet. No firing pulses are
output because the power converter is still locked because of a fault. The power converter
symbol is shown yellow again.

Acknowledging errors
The pending messages (faults, alarms that require acknowledgement) must be
acknowledged by clicking the "Acknowledge" button. This causes the power converter to
carry current again (exception for 2 x 100% power section redundancy). The power
converter symbol is shown green again. If messages remain pending after clicking the
"Acknowledge" button, the associated messages must be corrected with the available
assistance possibilities.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 227
Maintenance
9.7 Replacing fuses

9.7 Replacing fuses

Before replacing a fuse, the following preparations must be made as part of the "five safety
rules":
1. Disconnect completely
The line-side circuit breakers of the main circuit must be deactivated.
Disconnect the fuse-disconnector of the fan transformers.
Switch off the converter’s auxiliary voltage circuits.
2. Secure against reconnection
Adopt appropriate measures to secure the circuit breakers and all safety elements
against being reconnected.
3. Verify absence of operating voltage
4. Ground and short-circuit
Only a "grounding for work" (not short-circuit proof) is possible directly on the system.
This "grounding for work" serves only as additional protection potential compensation that
should prevent the occurrence of dangerous touch voltages at the working location.
The implementation of the grounding and short-circuiting equipment of the main circuit so
that it is short-circuit proof must be ensured on the power plant side (outside the
excitation system), taking into account the maximum short-circuit current that can occur.
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts
If the system is not deactivated on the power plant side, the covers on the connection
panel (IP20) for touch protection must remain installed. We recommend the fitting of an
additional cover to protect against small parts falling in.

Note
Replacing fuses on the initial excitation
If it is necessary to replace a fuse on the initial excitation, support must be requested from
Siemens Customer Support.

WARNING
Open cabinet doors
It is only permissible to operate the system with the cabinet doors closed. If servicing is
required, observe the safety regulations in accordance with EN 50110-1 and the
appropriate national regulations.
Failure to do so can result in material damage, serious injury or death.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

228 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.7 Replacing fuses

Removal steps
1. Remove the four M8 screws and the cover.

Figure 9-27 Removing the cover

2. Remove the two M6 screws and the front cover (tilt down by approximately 10° to the
front and remove from below).

Figure 9-28 Removing the power converter cover

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 229
Maintenance
9.7 Replacing fuses

3. Remove the two plugs of the temperature sensor cable and the three plugs of the
snubber cable.

Figure 9-29 Removing cables

4. Tilt the resistance module upwards and remove at the front. Lifting at the rear simplifies
the removal from the guide rail.

Figure 9-30 Snubber resistance module

This gives access to the fuses.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

230 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.7 Replacing fuses

5. Remove and install the M12 fuses.

Figure 9-31 Removing and installing fuses

For the fuse type, see the electrical bill of materials.

NOTICE
Observe the orientation of the fuses
The fuses must be inserted with the label upwards, where the indicator for the outer
fuses must point towards the center.

Note
Replacing a fuse set
We recommend that the complete set of fuses (6 or 12 fuses, depending on the DC
converter type) is always replaced. A fuse may be replaced only with precisely the same
type.

It takes approximately 30-40 minutes to replace the fuses.

Installation steps
Installing follows the same steps as removing, but in the reverse order.

NOTICE
Pay attention to the tightening torques
The tightening torques must be observed, see Chapter Torques for screw connections
(Page 80).
The screw connections for the protective covers must only be hand tightened.

See also Replacement of the power converter (Page 207)and Important safety instructions
(Page 188).

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 231
Maintenance
9.8 Installation of the software after component replacement

9.8 Installation of the software after component replacement

9.8.1 Installation of the software after replacement of the SIMATIC S7-300 CPU
A fault or the failure of a SIMATIC S7 PLC can make the replacement of the component
necessary.
The replacement of a SIMATIC S7 PLC during running operation can be performed only for
a redundant open-loop/closed-loop control channel.
1. The channel on which the SIMATIC S7 PLC is to be replaced must be inactive.
The information as to whether the channel is inactive or active is displayed on the
operator panel, see Chapter Operation (Page 113). If it is inactive, you can continue with
step 2. If it is active, the channel must be switched using the display and operator panel.
2. A switch back to the channel requiring repair must be prevented by activating the display
and operator panel channel switching lock.
3. Switch off the power supply of the S7 PLC.
4. Disconnect the PROFINET bus cable and remove the SIMATIC MMC.
5. Unscrew and remove the S7 PLC.
6. Insert and screw in the S7 PLC. Only a PLC with the same MLFB may be used to replace
the S7 PLC.
7. Insert the SIMATIC MMC and attach the PROFINET bus cable.
8. Switch on the power supply of the S7 PLC.
9. Wait until the S7 PLC has started.
10.Use the operator panel to acknowledge any faults resulting from the replacement.
11.Revoke the channel switching lock from the display and operator panel.
If the SIMATIC MMC is defective, it must also be replaced and the software installed as
specified in Chapter SIMATIC S7 installation (Page 110).

Figure 9-32 SIMATIC S7 PLCs

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

232 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Maintenance
9.8 Installation of the software after component replacement

9.8.2 Installation of the software after replacement of the SINAMICS DCM Control
Module
A fault in or the failure of a CUD/BCU can make the replacement of the SINAMICS DCM
Control Module necessary.
The replacement during running operation can be performed only for a redundant open-
loop/closed-loop control channel.
1. The channel on which the CUD/BCU is to be replaced must be inactive. The information
as to whether the channel is inactive or active is displayed on the operator panel, see
Chapter Operation (Page 113). If it is inactive, you can continue with step 2. If it is active,
the channel must be switched using the display and operator panel.
2. A switch back to the channel requiring repair must be prevented by activating the display
and operator panel channel switching lock.
3. Switch off the power supply to the affected SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE.
4. Remove the cover of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE.
5. Remove the cable connections to the SINAMICS DCM Control Module.
6. Remove the SINAMICS MMC.
7. Unscrew and remove the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE.
8. Insert and screw-in the replacement SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE.
9. Insert the SINAMICS MMC from the replaced SINAMICS DCM Control Module.
10.Attach the cable connections.
11.Switch on the power supply.
12.Wait for power-up to complete. If the installed software version does not match the
version on the SINAMICS MMC, an update to the version on the SINAMICS MMC is
performed automatically.
13.Attach the cover of the SINAMICS DCM Control Module SEE.
14.Load the system parameterization as specified in Chapter Operation (Page 113).
15.Use the operator panel to acknowledge any faults resulting from the replacement.
16.Revoke the channel switching lock from the display and operator panel.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 233
Maintenance
9.8 Installation of the software after component replacement

1 DQ cable to the cable connection

2 PROFINET CBE20 communications block, behind the SINAMICS MMC slot
3 Generator actual value acquisition and analog outputs of the BCU
4 X177 connector board (inputs/outputs of the CUD)
5 Connection to the power converters

Figure 9-33 Plug-in connections on the CUD/BCU

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

234 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
9.9 Replacement of the AC overvoltage protection (option L21)
If the fuses in the AC overvoltage protection trip, the entire device has to be replaced.
Before the AC overvoltage protection is replaced, the following preparations must be made
as part of the "five safety rules":

1. Disconnect completely
The line-side circuit breakers of the main circuit must be deactivated.
2. Secure against reconnection
Secure the circuit breaker(s) and all of the safety elements against reconnection by taking
suitable measures.
3. Verify absence of operating voltage
Verify complete absence of voltage at the main terminals of the AC overvoltage
protection.
4. Ground and short-circuit
Short-circuit proof implementation of the grounding and short-circuiting equipment of the
main circuit must be ensured on the power plant side (outside the excitation system),
taking into account the maximum short-circuit current that can occur.
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts

Once the "five safety rules" have been followed, the power and signal cables on the AC
overvoltage protection can be terminated. The device can then be replaced with a
replacement device of the same type. The termination covers inside the device to be
replaced have to be reinstalled so that touch protection is still ensured. The power and signal
cable connections must be reestablished. Finally, the "five safety rules" must be undone in
reverse order.

See also
Options (Page 47)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 235
Maintenance
9.9 Replacement of the AC overvoltage protection (option L21)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

236 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Spare parts 10
This documentation applies to the complete series of THYRIPOL excitation systems and
starting frequency converters with MLFB = 6RV80... .
A system-specific spare parts list is made available as part of the order and a spare parts
package recommended.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 237
Spare parts

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

238 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Disposal 11
Siemens feels a responsibility to play a role in protecting our environment and saving our
valuable natural resources. This is true for both our production and our products.
Even during development, we consider any possible environmental impact of future
products/systems. Our aim is to prevent harmful environmental effects or at least to reduce
them to an absolute minimum – above and beyond present regulations and legislation.
The use of hazardous substances (e.g. arsenic, asbestos, beryllium, cadmium, CFCS,
halogen and many others) has been avoided. Easy-to-dismantle connections have been
implemented and attention has been paid to increased purity of the materials used. In
addition, recyclable materials have been preferred, or materials that can be easily disposed
of.
The use of highly-integrated components has enabled the number of parts to be kept to a
minimum, with energy being used as efficiently as possible during production as a result.
Particular emphasis has been placed on ensuring that the metal and plastic parts have a low
volume and low weight, and that the number of different types is kept to a minimum.
Pollutant-free materials have been used for all significant parts. No flame retardants
containing halogen or insulation materials containing silicone have been used.
Environmental compatibility was a key criterion in selecting supplier parts.

Disposal and recycling

System components
Particular care must be taken when disposing of and recycling the following components:
● Batteries
● Capacitors
● Printed-circuit boards
● Electronic components
The devices must be disposed of or recycled in accordance with the applicable country-
specific guidelines and regulations.

Old devices
Dispose of your device in accordance with the applicable national regulations.

For questions relating to disposal, please contact Siemens Customer Support.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 239
Disposal

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

240 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Service & Support A
On-site service and spare parts
If you wish to request on-site service or if you require spare parts, please contact your local
sales representative who establishes the contact to the responsible service center.

Technical queries or additional information

If you have any technical queries or you require additional information, please contact the
Siemens Service Center.
Please have the following data ready:
● Order number
● Serial number
You can find this data on the rating plate of the device.
Answers to frequently asked questions and the possibility of sending your questions to the
service department can be found on the Internet.
Link: (http://siemens.com/automation/support-request) .
Your local contact partner can be found on the Internet.
Link: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16604999).

Contact to central technical support

Europe and Africa

Tel.: +49 911 895 7222 8:00 to 17:00 CET
Fax: +49 911 895 7223
E-mail: [email protected]

Americas
Tel.: +1 423 262 5710 8:00 to 17:00 Eastern Standard Time
Fax: +1 423 262 2231
E-mail: [email protected]

Asia/Australia/Pacific
Tel.: +86 10 6475 7575 7:30 to 17:30 Beijing local time
Fax: +86 10 6474 7474
E-mail: [email protected]

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 241
Service & Support

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

242 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Technical specifications and drawings B
B.1 Technical data

B.1.1 General data

Table B- 1 General technical specifications

Degree of protection in accordance Excitation system:

with EN 60529/IEC 60529 Standard IP32
Option IP43
Starting frequency converter (for compact units):
IP32, option M11 (filter mats at the air entry) required
IP41 with option M41
Overvoltage category III in accordance with EN 60664-1
Pollution degree 2 in accordance with EN 60664-1
EMC Excitation system:
EN 61800-3: Category C3 (emitted interference), second environment (immunity)
Starting frequency converter (for compact units):
EN 61800-3: Category C4 (emitted interference), second environment (immunity)
Short-circuit strength Excitation system:
Maximum permitted symmetric initial short-circuit alternating current: see type plate
Maximum permitted short-circuit duration of the main circuit: 150 ms
Starting frequency converter (for compact units):
Maximum permitted symmetric initial short-circuit alternating current: see type plate
Maximum permitted short-circuit duration: 100 ms
Peak reverse voltages of the thyris- Excitation system:
tors Devices 575 VAC: U_RRM = ≥2200 V
Devices 750 VAC: U_RRM = ≥2800 V
Devices 950 VAC: U_RRM = ≥4200 V
Line system, supply voltage and frequency
Excitation system Line system: Isolated system (IT)
Main circuit Supply voltage
• Maximum rated supply voltage, see Chapter Technical specifications of the static
excitation system (Page 258)
• Supply voltage upper limit, 110 % continuous
– 130 % for one second for the excitation of cylindrical-rotor machines
– 150 % for one second for the excitation of salient-pole machines
• Voltage lower limit 5 %

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 243
Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

Frequency
• Rated frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• Frequency upper limit, 110 % continuous, 120 % for one minute with increase of
the rated frequency to the overfrequency with 5 Hz/s
• Frequency upper limit 160% (at 110 % voltage) for the excitation of salient-pole
machines for one minute with increase of the rated frequency to the overfrequen-
cy with 10 Hz/s
• Frequency lower limit, 90 % continuous, 50% for two seconds
Starting frequency converter Line system: Isolated system (IT)
Main circuit Supply voltage
• Rated supply voltage, see Chapter Starting converter technical specifications
(Page 253)
• Upper limit, 110 % continuous
• Lower limit, 90 % continuous, 80 % for two seconds
Frequency
• Rated frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• Upper limit, 110 % continuous, although df/dt < 5 Hz/s
• Lower limit, 90 % continuous, although df/dt < 5 Hz/s
Converter circuit Current transformer:
3-phase, L1, L2, L3
Value range: IL1, L2, L3 = 1 A / 5 A
Power per phase = 5 VA
Voltage transformer:
3-phase, L1, L2, L3
Value range: UL1,L2,L3 =100 V / 110 V / 120 V
Power per phase = 40 mVA
Auxiliary supplies
DC auxiliary infeed for DC initial
excitation
(option L90 - L94)
DC auxiliary infeed 110 V DC • Current consumption with option L90 (initial excitation during operation [max.
+10 % / -20 % 20 s]): Max. 50 A
(option C11)
• Current consumption with option L91 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 50 A
• Current consumption with option L92 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 67 A
• Current consumption with option L93 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 67 A
• Current consumption with option L94 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 142 A

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

244 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

DC auxiliary infeed 125 V DC • Current consumption with option L90 (initial excitation during operation [max.
+10 % / -20 % 20 s]): Max. 45 A
(option C12)
• Current consumption with option L91 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 45 A
• Current consumption with option L92 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 62 A
• Current consumption with option L93 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 62 A
• Current consumption with option L94 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 131 A
DC auxiliary infeed 220 V DC • Current consumption with option L90 (initial excitation during operation [max.
+10 % / -20 % 20 s]): Max. 53 A
(option C22)
• Current consumption with option L91 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 53 A
• Current consumption with option L92 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 75 A
• Current consumption with option L93 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 75 A
• Current consumption with option L94 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 138 A
DC auxiliary infeed 250 V DC • Current consumption with option L90 (initial excitation during operation [max.
+10 % / -20 % 20 s]): Max. 49 A
(option C25)
• Current consumption with option L91 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 49 A
• Current consumption with option L92 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 71 A
• Current consumption with option L93 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 71 A
• Current consumption with option L94 (initial excitation during operation [max.
20 s]): Max. 143 A
Second infeed (option N30 - N39) Line system: Isolated system (IT)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 245
Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

Supply voltage
• Max. rated connection voltage and connection current (DC field current) of the
second infeed:
– Option N30 max. 3AC 690 V, max. 263 A (320 A DC)
– Option N31 max. 3AC 690 V, max. 394 A (480 A DC)
– Option N32 max. 3AC 690 V, max. 624 A (760 A DC)
– Option N33 max. 3AC 750 V, max. 984 A (1200 A DC)
– Option N34 max. 3AC 750 V, max. 1804 A (2200 A DC)
– Option N35 max. 3AC 750 V, max. 3690 A (4500 A DC)
– Option N37 max. 3AC 950 V, max. 1640 A (2000 A DC)
– Option N38 max. 3AC 950 V, max. 2952 A (3600 A DC)
– Option N39 max. 3AC 950 V, max. 4182 A (5100 A DC)

• Upper limit of the supply voltage 110 % continuous

• Lower limit of the connection voltage 5 %
Frequency
• Rated frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• Upper frequency limit 110% continuous, 120 % for 1 minute with an increase of
the rated frequency to excess frequency with 5 Hz/s
• Lower frequency limit 90 % continuous, 50 % for 2 s
Control circuits 24 VDC auxiliary supply
• 2× (redundant) 24 VDC +10 % / -20 %
– Current consumption (operation):
Excitation system max. 17 A

Compact unit max. 25 A

Grounded system (TN)
Short-circuit resistance (SCCR) ≤ 10 kA

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

246 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

DC auxiliary infeed:
• 2x (redundant) DC auxiliary infeed 110 VDC +10 % / -20 %
(option C11)
– Current consumption (operation):
Excitation system max. 4 A

Compact unit max. 6 A

• 2x (redundant) DC auxiliary infeed 125 VDC +10 % / -20 %
(option C12)
– Current consumption (operation):
Excitation system max. 3 A

Compact unit max. 5 A

• 2x (redundant) DC auxiliary infeed 220 VDC +10 % / -20 %
(option C22)
– Current consumption (operation):
Excitation system max. 2 A

Compact unit max. 3 A

• 2x (redundant) DC auxiliary infeed 250 VDC +10 % / -20 %
(option C25)
– Current consumption (operation):
Excitation system max. 2 A

Compact unit max. 3 A

• DC initial excitation from the power plant battery (option L90-L94)
– Current consumption (initial excitation in operation): 2…6 A
Isolated system (IT)
Short-circuit resistance (SCCR) ≤ 10 kA

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 247
Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

Alternating current circuits 1-phase AC auxiliary power supply:

Anti-condensation heating • 1-phase 230 VAC ±10 % / 50 Hz ±5 %
Illumination Alternative:
Auxiliary power outlet 1-phase AC auxiliary voltages can be selected with option Y11.
• 1-phase 120 VAC ±10 % / 60 Hz ±5 %
Note:
The voltage range and the power consumption must be observed for the following
options:
• Cabinet heating per cabinet; thermostat-regulated 1-phase 120 VAC
(option L54)
– Current consumption (cabinet heating in operation):
Excitation system typ. 15 A
Compact unit typ. 25 A
• Cabinet heating per cabinet; thermostat-regulated 1-phase 230 VAC
(option L55)
– Current consumption (cabinet heating in operation):
Excitation system typ. 8 A

Compact unit typ. 13 A

• Cabinet heating per cabinet; thermostat-regulated and hygrostat-regulated 1-
phase 120 - 240 VAC
(option L58)
– Current consumption (cabinet heating in operation):
Excitation system typ. 7-15 A

Compact unit typ. 13-25 A

• Cabinet heating per cabinet; 1-phase 100-240 VAC (option N86)
– Current consumption (cabinet illumination in operation):
Excitation system typ. 0.3-1 A

Compact unit typ. 0.5-1.5 A

Short-circuit resistance (SCCR) ≤ 10 kA
Grounded system (TN)
3-phase circuits Note:
Required for compact units
• Self-generated 24 VDC
– Current consumption (SFC in operation): max. 29 A (max. 47 A with option
M65)
from 3-phase auxiliary infeed, power supply unit 2 (option C03)
– Current consumption (operation): typ. 2.5 A
• AC initial excitation from the auxiliaries service (option L95-L99)
– Current consumption (initial excitation in operation): 2…6 A
• Fan supply can be switched to the 3-phase auxiliary infeed (option K52)
– Power consumption (fans are operated via the 3-phase auxiliary infeed): typ.
2.5 - 18 A

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

248 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

3-phase auxiliary power supply

• 3-phase 380 VAC ±10 % / 50 Hz ±5 % phase sequence L1-L2-L3 (clockwise
phase sequence)
(option C38)
• 3-phase 400 VAC ±10 % / 50 Hz ± 5% phase sequence L1-L2-L3 (clockwise
phase sequence)
(option C40)
• 3-phase 415 VAC ±10 % / 50 Hz ±5 % phase sequence L1-L2-L3 (clockwise
phase sequence)
(option C41)
• 3-phase 440 VAC ±10 % / 60 Hz ±5 % phase sequence L1-L2-L3 (clockwise
phase sequence)
(option C44)
• 3-phase 460 VAC ±10 % / 60 Hz ±5 % phase sequence L1-L2-L3 (clockwise
phase sequence)
(option C46)
• 3-phase 480 VAC ±10 % / 60 Hz ±5 % phase sequence L1-L2-L3 (clockwise
phase sequence)
(option C48)
Short-circuit resistance (SCCR) ≤ 10 kA
Line system: Isolated system (IT) or grounded system (TN)
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature Operation with rated current 0 °C to 40 °C1)
Transportation -20 °C to +60 °C
Storage -20 °C to +60 °C
Installation altitude Up to 1,000 m above sea level
up to 2,000 m above sea level with option M30
up to 4,000 m above sea level with option M31
Environmental class See table below
Surface
Cabinet color RAL 7035; other colors available as option
Mechanical strength for earthquakes
Eurocode 8 (DIN EN 1998-1) and IBC 2006/2009
The specified earthquake spectra conform to Eurocode 8 (DIN EN 1998-1) depending on the subsoil classes and region-
dependent soil acceleration values, and conform to IBC 2006/2009 depending on the Occupancy Category and the Site
Class.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 249
Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

Functional safety Three-axis simultaneous excitation (response spectrum method): 1 to 35 Hz

Rigid body horizontal acceleration a:
a = 0.385 g horizontal x, y-direction
a = 0.385 g vertical z-direction
a = 0.67 g total vector
Remark: Values apply to installation in the ground floor

Stability/integrity Three-axis simultaneous excitation (response spectrum method): 1 to 35 Hz

Rigid body horizontal acceleration a:
a = 0.6 g horizontal x, y-direction
a = 0.6 g vertical z-direction
a = 1.04 g total vector
Remark: Values apply to installation in the ground floor

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

250 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

1) Excitation system:
Upgrade for ambient temperature 45 °C (option M20)
Upgrade for ambient temperature 50 °C (option M25)
Starting frequency converter:
The small fan in the reactor cabinet (option M62) permits operation up to 45 °C (depending on the load cycle, M62 or M63)
The large fan in the reactor cabinet (option M63) permits operation up to 45 °C (depending on the load cycle, M62 or M63)
Upgrade for ambient temperature 50 °C (option M66)

Note
The power requirement is described in the project-specific data sheet of the excitation
system / compact unit.
Because of the range of types and options, a statement concerning the power requirement
can be made only for a specific project.

Table B- 2 Environmental class in accordance with DIN IEC 60721-3 Part 1 to 3

Usage Environmental condition Environmental class Remark

Operation Climatic 3K3 Extended supply temperature range availa-
ble as option (see also footnote 1) for the
above table):
• Compact units and individual excitation
up to +50 °C
Relative humidity depending on the supply
air temperature in accordance with the cli-
mate diagram, see figure below.
Condensation not permitted.
Biological 3B1 -
Mechanical 3M1 -
Transport with- Climatic 2K2 -
out packaging Biological 2B1 -
Mechanical 2M2 Dropping not permitted
Storage without Climatic 1K3 -
packaging Biological 1B1 -
Mechanical 1M1 -

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 251
Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

Figure B-1 Climate diagram for 3K3, including extension for temperature range up to 55 °C

B.1.2 Starting converter

B.1.2.1 Load cycle

The starting converters are designed for the following load cycle (provided option N88 is
available):

1. Ventilation of the boiler with 70% of the SFC rated power 10 minutes
2. Break 1 minute
3. Startup with 100 % power 4 minutes
4. Break 2.5 minutes
This load cycle can be repeated four times. A cooling phase for 120 minutes must then be
observed.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

252 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

Figure B-2 Load cycle

Note
Other load cycles
Other load cycles are possible (option Y45), but must be tested and released by Siemens.
Please contact your Siemens sales representative for configuring assistance.

Note
Load cycles without option N88
Without option N88, four starting operations with 100% power are possible without a
previous ventilation of the boiler.

B.1.2.2 Starting converter technical specifications

Note
Starting frequency converters can be acquired only as part of a compact unit. Safety
constructions for the starting frequency converter output are not part of the scope of delivery.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 253
Table B- 3 Starting frequency converter technical specifications (1) Variant with stack technology (vertically arranged
stacks)

Type/Pconv 2.9 4.0 5.0 6.0

Pulse count - LSPC / MSPC 6p/6p 6p/6p 6p/6p 6p/6p
Number of stacks - LSPC / 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1
MSPC
MLFB 6RV80xx -xxxxx-x AB4 AA4 AC4 AF4
Infeed apparent power 3700 kVA 5100 kVA 6250 kVA 7700 kVA
Rated supply voltage 1.4 kV 2.5 kV 2.5 kV 2.88 kV
Rated power 2.9 MW 4.0 MW 5.0 MW 6.0 MW
DC-link current 1850 A 1430 A 1770 A 1850 A
DC-link voltage 1600 V 2830 V 2830 V 3290 V
Weight (without options) 3700 kg 3500 kg 3800 kg 4300 kg
Dimensions (W×D×H)1) 2104×1000×2664 2104×1000×2664 2104×1000×2664 2104×1000×2664
mm mm mm mm
(2104×1200×2664 (2104×1200×2664 (2104×1200×2664 (2104×1200×2664
mm) mm) mm) mm)
Number of fans 2 2 2 2
Total power loss 36 kW 45 kW 53 kW 63 kW
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection without 83 dB(A) 83 dB(A) 83 dB(A) 83 dB(A)
the M65 option

• 50 Hz connection with 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A)

the M65 option

• 60 Hz connection without 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A)

the M65 option

• 60 Hz connection with 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A)

the M65 option
Cooling air requirement 7200 m3/h 7200 m3/h 7200 m3/h 7200 m3/h
1) The height details include the transport frame (100 mm) and fan (364 mm). Dimensions in parentheses differ only in the
depth (1000 mm or 1200 mm). The depth is selected in accordance with the excitation system.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 254
Table B- 4 Starting frequency converter technical specifications (2) Variant with stack technology (vertically arranged
stacks)

Type/Pconv 7.5 7.5 9.0 9.0

Pulse count - LSPC / MSPC 6p/6p 12p/6p 6p/6p 12p/6p
Number of stacks - LSPC / 2/1 2/1 2/2 2/2
MSPC
MLFB 6RV80xx -xxxxx-x GG4 FG4 AE4 BE4
Infeed apparent power 9600 kVA, uk = 15% 2 x 4800 kVA, uk 11400 kVA 2 x 5700 kVA
=15%
Rated supply voltage 3.2 kV 2 x 1.6 kV 4.6 kV 2 x 2.3 kV
Rated power 7.5 MW 7.5 MW 9.0 MW 9.0 MW
DC-link current 2110 A 2110 A 1750 A 1750 A
DC-link voltage 3580 V 3580 V 5200 V 5200 V
Weight (without options) Approx. 5400 kg Approx. 5400 kg Approx. 6000 kg Approx. 6000 kg
Dimensions (W×D×H)1) 3004×1200×2664 3004×1200×2664 3604×1200×2664 3604×1200×2664
mm mm mm mm
Number of fans 3 3 4 4
Total power loss Approx. 77 kW Approx. 77 kW 91 kW 91 kW
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection without 83 dB(A) 83 dB(A) 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A)
the M65 option

• 50 Hz connection with 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A) 78 dB(A) 78 dB(A)

the M65 option

• 60 Hz connection without 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A) 88 dB(A) 88 dB(A)

the M65 option

• 60 Hz connection with 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A) 78 dB(A) 78 dB(A)

the M65 option
Cooling air requirement 10800 m3/h 10800 m3/h 14400 m3/h 14400 m3/h
1) The height details include the transport frame (100 mm) and fan (364 mm). Dimensions in parentheses differ only in the
depth (1000 mm or 1200 mm). The depth is selected in accordance with the excitation system.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 255
Table B- 5 Starting frequency converter technical specifications (3) Variant with stack technology (horizontally arranged
stacks)

Type/Pconv 2.9 4.0 5.0

Pulse count - LSPC / MSPC 6p/6p 6p/6p 6p/6p
Number of stacks - LSPC / 1/1 1/1 1/1
MSPC
MLFB 6RV80xx -xxxxx-x AB5 AA5 AC5
Infeed apparent power 3700 kVA 5100 kVA 6250 kVA
Rated supply voltage 1.4 kV 2.5 kV 2.5 kV
Rated power 2.9 MW 4.0 MW 5.0 MW
DC-link current 1850 A 1430 A 1770 A
DC-link voltage 1600 V 2830 V 2830 V
Weight (without options) 2400 kg 2800 kg 2800 kg
Dimensions (W×D×H)1) 2104×1000×2664 mm 2104×1000×2664 mm 2104×1000×2664 mm
Number of fans 2 3 3
Total power loss 41 kW 50 kW 55 kW
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection without 83 dB(A) 83 dB(A) 83 dB(A)
the M65 option

• 50 Hz connection with 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A)

the M65 option

• 60 Hz connection without 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A) 85 dB(A)

the M65 option

• 60 Hz connection with 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A) 76 dB(A)

the M65 option
Cooling air requirement 7200 m3/h 10800 m3/h 10800 m3/h
1) The height details include the transport frame (100 mm) and fan (364 mm).

B.1.2.3 Derating (for the starting converter)

If the starting converter is operated at an installation altitude higher than 1,000 m above sea
level, a derating factor for the rated current must be taken into account.

Table B- 6 Current derating as a function of the installation altitude

Installation altitude above sea level Derating factor

up to 1,000 m 1.00
2,000 m 0.90
3,000 m 0.85

Intermediate values can be obtained through linear interpolation.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 256
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

For installation altitudes above > 2,000 m, in addition to the current derating, a voltage
derating must also be considered.

Table B- 7 Voltage derating as a function of the installation altitude

Installation altitude above sea level Derating factor

up to 2,000 m 1.00
3,000 m 0.90

Intermediate values can be obtained through linear interpolation.

B.1.3 Static excitation system

B.1.3.1 Load cycle

The specified technical specifications for the excitation system apply to the standard load
cycle with an impact (surge) excitation with 140% field current for 10 seconds.
The configuring of an impact excitation with up to 210% field current for as long as
30 seconds is possible under customization factors. See Chapter Configuring of optional
load cycles (Page 268).
The systems are dimensioned for two impact excitations within an interval of ten minutes.

Figure B-3 Load cycle

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 257
Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

B.1.3.2 Technical specifications of the static excitation system

Plants with power section redundancy

Table B- 8 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 575 VAC

MLFB 6RV8013-2Ex57-6DD1 6RV8020-2Ex57-6DD1

Type US/IEN 575 / 1375 575 / 2050
Redundancy 2 × 100 % 2 × 100 %
Rated field current IFNref 1) 1250 A 1865 A
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous current IENref 1375 A 2050 A
Surge current Ip_ref (10 seconds) 1750 A 2610 A
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 1.4 1.4
Maximum rated field supply voltage up 575 V 575 V
to 1)
Power loss in rated operation 7 kW 12 kW
Power loss at 75% for rated operation 5) 6 kW 8 kW
Power loss at 50% for rated operation 5) 5 kW 7 kW
Weight (excitation system only) 1,950 kg 2,000 kg
(without options)
Dimensions 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm
Dimensions for option M90 1200 × 1000 × 2200 mm n.a.
Number of fans 3) 2 2
Cooling air requirement 5000 m3/h 5000 m3/h
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

258 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Table B- 9 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 750 VAC (1)

MLFB 6RV8016-2Ex75-6DD1 6RV8022-2Ex75-6DD1 6RV8024-2Ex75-6DD1

Type US/IEN 750 / 1600 750 / 2200 750 / 2400
Redundancy 2 × 100 % 2 × 100 % 2 × 100 %
Rated field current IFNref 1) 1455 A 2000 A 2180 A
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous current 1600 A 2200 A 2400 A
IENref
Surge current Ip_ref (10 sec- 2040 A 2800 A 3050 A
onds)
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 1.4 1.4 1.4
Maximum rated field supply 750 V 750 V 750 V
voltage up to 1)
Power loss in rated operation 9 kW 11 kW 12 kW
Power loss at 75% for rated 8 kW 9 kW 10 kW
operation 5)
Power loss at 50% for rated 7 kW 7 kW 8 kW
operation 5)
Weight (excitation system 2,000 kg 2,000 kg 2550 kg
only)
(without options)
Dimensions 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm
Dimensions for option M90 1200 × 1000 × 2200 mm n.a. n.a.
Number of fans 3) 2 2 2
Cooling air requirement 5000 m3/h 5000 m3/h 5000 m3/h
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 259
Table B- 10 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 750 VAC (2)

MLFB 6RV8045-3Ex75-6DD1 6RV8051-4Ex75-6DD1 6RV8068-4Ex75-6DD1 6RV8077-5Ex75-6DD1

Type US/IEN 750 / 4500 750 / 5100 750 / 6800 750 / 7700
Redundancy 3 × 50% (n-1) 4 × 33% (n-1) 4 × 33 % (n-1) 5 × 25% (n-1)
Rated field current 4090 A 4635 A 6180 A 7000 A
IFNref 1)
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous 4500 A 5100 A 6800 A 7700 A
current IENref
Surge current Ip_ref (10 5725 A 8655 A 8655 A 9800 A
seconds)
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 1.4 1.87 1.4 1.4
Maximum rated field 750 V 750 V 750 V 750 V
supply voltage up to 1)
Power loss in rated 23 kW 26 kW 35 kW 50 kW 4)
operation
Power loss at 75% for 17 kW 20 kW 25 kW 34 kW 4)
rated operation 5)
Power loss at 50% for 13 kW 15 kW 18 kW 23 kW 4)
rated operation 5)
Weight (excitation 3150 kg 3500 kg 4350 kg 6,000 kg
system only)
(without options)
Dimensions 2700 × 1000 × 2700 × 1000 × 3600 × 1000 × 5100 × 1000 ×
2200 mm 2200 mm 2200 mm 2200 mm
Number of fans 3) 3 4 4 5
Cooling air require- 7500 m3/h 10000 m3/h 10000 m3/h 12500 m3/h
ment
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
4) Redundancy exists with all power converters in operation
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 260
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

Table B- 11 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 950 VAC

MLFB 6RV8018-2Ex95-6DD1 6RV8034-3Ex95-6DD1 6RV8051-4Ex95-6DD1 6RV8068-5Ex95-6DD1

Type US/IEN 950 / 1800 950 / 3400 950 / 5100 950 / 6800
Configuration 2 × 100 % 3 × 50% (n-1) 4 × 33% (n-1) 5 × 25% (n-1)
Rated field current 1635 A 3090 A 4635 A 6180 A
IFNref 1)
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous 1800 A 3400 A 5100 A 6800 A
current IENref
Surge current Ip_ref (10 2290 A 4330 A 6490 A 8655 A
seconds)
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
Maximum rated field 950 V 950 V 950 V 950 V
supply voltage up to 1)
Power loss in rated 13 kW 22 kW 34 kW 45 kW
operation
Power loss at 75% for 10 kW 17 kW 25 kW 33 kW
rated operation 5)
Power loss at 50% for 9 kW 13 kW 18 kW 23 kW
rated operation 5)
Weight (excitation 2200 kg 3150 kg 3500 kg 5000 kg
system only)
(without options)
Dimensions 1800 × 1000 × 2700 × 1000 × 2700 × 1000 × 4200 × 1000 ×
2200 mm 2200 mm 2200 mm 2200 mm
Number of fans 3) 2 3 4 5
Cooling air require- 5000 m3/h 7500 m3/h 10000 m3/h 12500 m3/h
ment
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 261
Systems with power section redundancy n-2
The maximum peak current Ip_ref can be achieved with a defective power converter.
The maximum continuous current IENref can be achieved with up to two defective power
converters.

Table B- 12 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 750 VAC

MLFB 6RV8024-3Ex75-6DD1 6RV8045-4Ex75-6DD1 6RV8068-5Ex75-6DD1

Type US/IEN 750 / 2400 750 / 4500 750 / 6800
Configuration 3 × 100% (n-2) 4 × 50% (n-2) 5 × 33% (n-2)
Rated field current IFNref 1) 2180 A 4090 A 6180 A
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous current 2400 A 4500 A 6800 A
IENref
Surge current Ip_ref (10 sec- 5725 A 8655 A 9800 A
onds)
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 2.6 2.1 1.6
Maximum rated field supply 750 V 750 V 750 V
voltage up to 1)
Power loss in rated operation 13 kW 23 kW 34 kW 4)
Power loss at 75% for rated 11 kW 18 kW 25 kW 4)
operation 5)
Power loss at 50% for rated 10 kW 14 kW 19 kW 4)
operation 5)
Weight (excitation system 3150 kg 4350 kg 5000 kg
only)
(without options)
Dimensions 2700 × 1000 × 2200 mm 3600 × 1000 × 2200 mm 4200 × 1000 × 2200 mm
Number of fans 3) 3 4 5
Cooling air requirement 7500 m3/h 10000 m3/h 12500 m3/h
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
4) Redundancy exists with all power converters in operation
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 262
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

Table B- 13 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 950 VAC

MLFB 6RV8018-3Ex95-6DD1 6RV8034-4Ex95-6DD1 6RV8051-5Ex95-6DD1

Type US/IEN 950 / 1800 950 / 3400 950 / 5100
Configuration 3 × 100 % (n-2) 4 × 50% (n-2) 5 × 33% (n-2)
Rated field current IFNref 1) 1635 A 3090 A 4635 A
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous current 1800 A 3400 A 5100 A
IENref
Surge current Ip_ref (10 sec- 4330 A 6490 A 8655 A
onds)
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 2.6 2.1 1.9
Maximum rated field supply 950 V 950 V 950 V
voltage up to 1)
Power loss in rated operation 15 kW 24 kW 35 kW
Power loss at 75% for rated 13 kW 19 kW 27 kW
operation 5)
Power loss at 50% for rated 11 kW 16 kW 21 kW
operation 5)
Weight (excitation system 3150 kg 3500 kg 4150 kg
only)
(without options)
Dimensions 2700 × 1000 × 2200 mm 2700 × 1000 × 2200 mm 4200 × 1000 × 2200 mm
Number of fans 3) 3 4 5
Cooling air requirement 7500 m3/h 10000 m3/h 12500 m3/h
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 263
Systems without power section redundancy

Table B- 14 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 575 VAC

MLFB 6RV8013-1Ex57-6DD1 6RV8020-1Ex57-6DD1

Type US/IEN 575 / 1375 575 / 2050
Configuration 1 × 100 % 1 × 100 %
Rated field current IFNref 1) 1250 A 1860 A
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous current IENref 1375 A 2050 A
Surge current Ip_ref (10 seconds) 1750 A 2610 A
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 1.4 1.4
Maximum rated field supply voltage up 575 V 575 V
to 1)
Power loss in rated operation 7 kW 12 kW
Power loss at 75% for rated operation 5) 6 kW 8 kW
Power loss at 50% for rated operation 5) 4 kW 6 kW
Weight (excitation system only) 1,750 kg 1,800 kg
(without options)
Dimensions 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm
Dimensions for option M90 1200 × 1000 × 2200 mm n.a.
Number of fans 3) 1 1
Cooling air requirement 2500 m3/h 2500 m3/h
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 264
Table B- 15 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 750 VAC (1)

MLFB 6RV8016-1Ex75-6DD1 6RV8022-1Ex75-6DD1 6RV8024-1Ex75-6DD1

Type US/IEN 750 / 1600 750 / 2200 750 / 2400
Configuration 1 × 100 % 1 × 100 % 1 × 100 %
Rated field current IFNref 1) 1455 A 2000 A 2180 A
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous current 1600 A 2200 A 2400 A
IENref
Surge current Ip_ref (10 sec- 2040 A 2800 A 3050 A
onds)
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 1.4 1.4 1.4
Maximum rated field supply 750 V 750 V 750 V
voltage up to 1)
Power loss in rated operation 9 kW 12 kW 14 kW
Power loss at 75% for rated 7 kW 9 kW 10 kW
operation 5)
Power loss at 50% for rated 5 kW 6 kW 7 kW
operation 5)
Weight (excitation system 1,800 kg 1,800 kg 2200 kg
only)
(without options)
Dimensions 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm 1800 × 1000 × 2200 mm 2100 × 1000 × 2200 mm
Dimensions for option M90 1200 × 1000 × 2200 mm n.a. n.a.
Number of fans 3) 1 1 1
Cooling air requirement 2500 m3/h 2500 m3/h 2500 m3/h
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 265
Table B- 16 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 750 VAC (2)

MLFB 6RV8045-2Ex75-6DD1 6RV8051-3Ex75-6DD1 6RV8068-3Ex75-6DD1 6RV8077-4Ex75-6DD1

Type US/IEN 750 / 4500 750 / 5100 750 / 6800 750 / 7700
Configuration 2 × 50 % 3 × 33 % 3 × 33 % 4 × 25 %
Rated field current 4090 A 4635 A 6180 A 7000 A
IFNref 1)
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous 4500 A 5100 A 6800 A 7700 A
current IENref
Surge current Ip_ref (10 5725 A 8655 A 8655 A 9800 A
seconds)
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 1.4 1.87 1.4 1.4
Maximum rated field 750 V 750 V 750 V 750 V
supply voltage up to 1)
Power loss in rated 26 kW 27 kW 39 kW 42 kW
operation
Power loss at 75% for 18 kW 18 kW 26 kW 29 kW
rated operation 5)
Power loss at 50% for 12 kW 14 kW 17 kW 19 kW
rated operation 5)
Weight (excitation 2550 kg 3150 kg 3950 kg 5 500 kg
system only)
(without options)
Dimensions 2100 × 1000 × 2700 × 1000 × 3600 × 1000 × 4500 × 1000 ×
2200 mm 2200 mm 2200 mm 2200 mm
Number of fans 3) 2 3 3 4
Cooling air require- 5000 m3/h 7500 m3/h 7500 m3/h 10000 m3/h
ment
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 266
Table B- 17 Technical specifications of excitation systems with supply voltage up to 950 VAC

MLFB 6RV8018-1Ex95-6DD1 6RV8034-2Ex95-6DD1 6RV8051-3Ex95-6DD1 6RV8068-4Ex95-6DD1

Type US/IEN 950 / 1800 950 / 3400 950 / 5100 950 / 6800
Configuration 1 × 100 % 2 × 50 % 3 × 33 % 4 × 25 %
Rated field current 1635 A 3090 A 4635 A 6180 A
IFNref 1)
Test voltage up to 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s 5400 Vac 50 Hz / 72 s
Maximum continuous 1800 A 3400 A 5100 A 6800 A
current IENref
Surge current Ip_ref (10 2290 A 4330 A 6490 A 8655 A
seconds)
Factor Ip_ref/ IFNref 2) 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
Maximum rated field 950 V 950 V 950 V 950 V
supply voltage up to 1)
Power loss in rated 14 kW 25 kW 37 kW 49 kW
operation
Power loss at 75% for 10 kW 18 kW 26 kW 34 kW
rated operation 5)
Power loss at 50% for 7 kW 12 kW 18 kW 23 kW
rated operation 5)
Weight (excitation 1850 kg 2200 kg 3150 kg 4350 kg
system only)
(without options)
Dimensions 1800 × 1000 × 2100 × 1000 × 2700 × 1000 × 3600 × 1000 ×
2200 mm 2200 mm 2200 mm 2200 mm
Number of fans 3) 1 2 3 4
Cooling air require- 2500 m3/h 5000 m3/h 7500 m3/h 10000 m3/h
ment
Sound pressure level
• 50 Hz connection 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA 72 dBA

• 60 Hz connection 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA 75 dBA

1) Rated quantities of the system are defined project-specific

2) For different factors, see below
3) valid for non-redundant fan variant
5) The values represent orientation values

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 267
B.1.3.3 Configuring of optional load cycles
The details in Chapter Technical specifications of the static excitation system (Page 258)
apply to a standard load cycle as shown in Chapter Load cycle (Page 257).
If the load cycles should be configured different from the standard, the values for the peak
current (Ip), the rated excitation current (IFN) and the maximum continuous current (IEN) by
calculating using the following listed formulas

Peak current
Ip = Ip_ref × K_IPEAK × K_IPEAKDAUER
Ip_ref Surge current for standard load cycle from the Technical Specifica-
tions table
K_IPEAK Surge current correction factor from the graphic below
K_IPEAKDAUER Current correction factor from the graphic below

Rated field current

IFN = IFNref × K_IFN × K_IPEAKDAUER
IFNref Rated field current for the standard load cycle from the Technical
Specifications table
K_IFN Rated current correction factor from the graphic below
K_IPEAKDAUER Current correction factor from the graphic below

Maximum continuous current

IEN = IENref × K_IFN × K_IPEAKDAUER
IENref Maximum continuous current for standard load cycle from the
Technical Specifications table
K_IFN Rated current correction factor from the graphic below
K_IPEAKDAUER Current correction factor from the graphic below

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 268
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

K_IPEAK Surge current correction factor

K_IFN Rated current correction factor

Figure B-4 Currents correction factor

Figure B-5 Surge current duration correction factor

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 269
Technical specifications and drawings
B.1 Technical data

B.1.3.4 Derating (for the excitation system)

The details in the technical specifications apply under the following conditions:
● Ambient temperature up to 40° C
● IP32, IP43 degree of protection
● Installation altitude up to 1,000 m above sea level
If the conditions differ, a power derating must be considered during the configuring.
The factors contained in the following tables must be used for the surge current, the rated
field current and the maximum continuous current during the configuring:

Peak current = Ip (or Ip_ref) × K_Temp × K_IP × K_AH

Rated field current = IFN (or IFNref) × K_temp × K_IP × K_AH
Maximum continuous cur- = IEN (or IENref) × K_temp × K_IP × K_AH
rent

Table B- 18 Derating factors for higher ambient temperature

Ambient temperature Derating factor K_Temp

up to 40 °C 1.00
45 °C (option M20) 0.91
50 °C (option M25) 0.82
55 °C (on request) 0.73

Intermediate values can be obtained through linear interpolation.

Table B- 19 Derating factors for higher degree of protection

Degree of protection Derating factor K_IP

IP32 1.00
IP43 (option M43) 1.00
IP43 with increased dust protection (option M44) 0.85

Table B- 20 Derating factors for higher installation heights (with option M30/M31)

Installation altitude above sea level Derating factor K_AH

up to 1,000 m 1.00
2,000 m (option M30) 0.88
3,000 m (option M31) 0.78
4,000 m (option M31) 0.68

Intermediate values can be obtained through linear interpolation.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

270 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

B.2 Dimension drawings

Note
Detailed dimensioned drawings for the ordered system are contained in the supplied project-
specific documentation.

For the following dimension drawings:

● Unless specified otherwise, all dimensions in mm
● Minimum clearance to the ceiling 200 mm
● We strongly recommend to provided an appropriate service in front of and behind the
cabinet.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 271
Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

B.2.1 Static excitation systems

Figure B-6 Dimension drawing of the excitation system

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

272 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-7 Dimension drawing of the excitation system

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 273
Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-8 Dimension drawing of the excitation system

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

274 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-9 Dimension drawing of the excitation system

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 275
Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-10 Dimension drawing of the excitation system

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

276 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-11 Dimension drawing of the excitation system

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 277
Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-12 Dimension drawing of the excitation system

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

278 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-13 Dimension drawing of the excitation system

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 279
Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

B.2.2 Compact systems (examples)

Figure B-14 Compact system dimensioned drawing

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

280 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-15 Compact system dimensioned drawing

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 281
Technical specifications and drawings
B.2 Dimension drawings

Figure B-16 Compact system dimensioned drawing

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

282 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.3 Block diagrams

B.3 Block diagrams

Figure B-17 Schematic circuit diagram

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 283
Technical specifications and drawings
B.3 Block diagrams

Figure B-18 SEE power converter circuit-diagram for the U-V-W phase sequence (delivered state)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

284 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.3 Block diagrams

Table B- 21 Cables in the power converter

No. Function Shape No. Function Shape

1 RC circuit Cable ducts 27 RC circuit Cable ducts
2 RC circuit Cable ducts 28 RC circuit Cable ducts
3 RC circuit Metal bridges 29 RC circuit Cable ducts
4 RC circuit Metal bridges 30 RC circuit Cable ducts
5 RC circuit Metal bridges 31 Firing signal V141 (U-) Cable ducts
6 RC circuit Metal bridges 32 Firing signal V111 (U+) Cable ducts
7 RC circuit Cable ducts 33 Firing signal V161 (V-) Cable ducts
8 RC circuit Cable ducts 34 Firing signal V131 (V+) Cable ducts
9 RC circuit Cable ducts 35 Firing signal V121 (W-) Cable ducts
10 RC circuit Cable ducts 36 Firing signal V151 (V+) Cable ducts
11 RC circuit Cable ducts 37 Actual current U (W) Part of the current trans-
former
12 RC circuit Cable ducts 38 Actual current V Part of the current trans-
former
13 RC circuit Metal bridges 39 Actual current W (U) Part of the current trans-
former
14 RC circuit Metal bridges 40 Firing signals U and sup- Ribbon cable bridges
ply
15 RC circuit Metal bridges 41 Firing signals V and sup- Ribbon cable bridges
ply
16 RC circuit Metal bridges 42 Firing signals W and Ribbon cable bridges
supply
17 RC circuit Cable ducts 43 Flap sensor cable, left Part of the sensor
18 RC circuit Cable ducts 44 Flap sensor cable, right Part of the sensor
19 RC circuit Cable ducts 45 Exhaust temperature Part of the sensor
sensor cable
20 RC circuit Cable ducts 46 Exhaust temperature Part of the sensor
sensor cable
21 RC circuit Cable ducts 47 Reserve -
22 RC circuit Cable ducts 48 Reserve -
23 RC circuit Metal bridges 49 Exhaust temperature Cable ducts
sensor cable extension
24 RC circuit Metal bridges 50 Exhaust temperature Cable ducts
sensor cable extension
25 RC circuit Metal bridges 51 Supply temperature sen- Part of the sensor
sor cable
26 RC circuit Metal bridges 52 Supply temperature sen- Part of the sensor
sor cable

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 285
Technical specifications and drawings
B.3 Block diagrams

Table B- 22 Connector on the A7223 module

Designation Function Remark

X_1 Supply and control -
X_T1 Pulse output -
X_T2 Pulse output -

Table B- 23 Connector on the A7224 module

Designation Pin Assignment Remark

XBU 1 Current transformer, phase U Duplicated connected
2 Current transformer, phase U Duplicated connected
XBV 1 Current transformer, phase V -
2 Current transformer, phase V -
XBW 1 Current transformer, phase W Duplicated connected
2 Current transformer, phase W Duplicated connected
XTR 1 Door limit switch (potential-free NO contact) -
2 -
XL1 1 Fan contactor 1, 24 VDC -
2 Fan contactor 1, mass -
XL2 1 Fan contactor 2, 24 VDC -
2 Fan contactor 2, mass -
XTA1 1 Exhaust air temperature sensor 1 -
2 -
XTA2 1 Exhaust air temperature sensor 2 -
2 -
XTZ1 1 Intake air temperature sensor 1 -
2 -
XTZ2 1 Intake air temperature sensor 2 -
2 -
XC1.A A1 Mass (not used) -
A2 24 VDC (not used) -
A3 0-10 V (not used) -
A4 n.c. -
A5 n.c. -
A6 n.c. -
XC1.B B1 Mass -
B2 24 VDC -
B3 Flap sensor 2 -
B4 Mass -
B5 24 VDC -
B6 Flap sensor 1 -

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

286 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Technical specifications and drawings
B.3 Block diagrams

Designation Pin Assignment Remark

X21A 1 to 26 Reserve -
XSY1 1 Mass -
2 Power converter U -
3 -
4 Mass -
5 Power converter V -
6 -
7 Mass -
8 Power converter W -
9 -
10 Mass -
11 Intake air temperature -
12 Outlet air temperature -
13 Mass -
14 Pressure (not used) -
15 Mass -
16 Fan flap sensor 1 -
17 Fan flap sensor 2 -
18 Door limit contact -
19 Firing module failure -
20 Fan 1 On -
21 Fan 2 On -
22 Mass -
23 Firing pulse 1 -
24 Mass -
25 Firing pulse 2 -
26 Mass -
27 Firing pulse 3 -
28 Mass -
29 Firing pulse 4 -
30 Mass -
31 Firing pulse 5 -
32 Mass -
33 Firing pulse 6 -
34 Mass -
XSY2 1 Mass -
2 Power converter U -
3 -
4 Mass -
5 Power converter V -
6 -
7 Mass -

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 287
Technical specifications and drawings
B.3 Block diagrams

Designation Pin Assignment Remark

8 Power converter W -
9 -
10 Mass -
11 Intake air temperature -
12 Outlet air temperature -
13 Mass -
14 Pressure (not used) -
15 Mass -
16 Fan flap sensor 1 -
17 Fan flap sensor 2 -
18 Door limit contact -
19 Firing module failure -
20 Fan 1 On -
21 Fan 2 On -
22 Mass -
23 Firing pulse 1 -
24 Mass -
25 Firing pulse 2 -
26 Mass -
27 Firing pulse 3 -
28 Mass -
29 Firing pulse 4 -
30 Mass -
31 Firing pulse 5 -
32 Mass -
33 Firing pulse 6 -
34 Mass -
XP24 1 Supply 1, 24 VDC -
2 Supply 1, mass -
3 Supply 2, 24 VDC -
4 Supply 2, mass -

Table B- 24 Connector on the A7113 module

Designation Function Remark

X100 / X104 Snubber capacitor -
X101 / X105 Snubber capacitor -
X102 / X108 Snubber capacitor -
X103 / X109 Snubber capacitor -
X106 / X110 Snubber capacitor -
X107 / X111 Snubber capacitor -

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

288 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter
Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 289
Additional documents C
C.1 List of abbreviations

German English
A
AC Wechselstrom AC Alternating Current
ADB Anlagendatenblatt SDS System Data Sheet
AI Analogeingang AI Analog Input
AS Anschlussschrank AS Interface cabinet
AUR Anfahrumrichter SFC Starting Frequency Converter
AUTO AUTOMATIK-Betrieb AUTO Automatic mode
AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator
B
BAR Blindleistungsausgleichsregelung RPJC Reactive Power Joined Control
BCU Symmetrieregelungsbaugruppe BCU Balance Control Unit
C
CF Compact Flash CF Compact Flash
CP342-5 Kommunikationsprozessor CP342-5 Communications Processor
CPU Central processing unit CPU Central Processing Unit
CSV Comma-separated values (Dateiformat) CSV Comma-separated values (file format)
CU320-2 SINAMICS Control Unit 320 CU320-2 SINAMICS Control Unit 320
CUD Control unit DC CUD Control Unit DC
D
DC Gleichstrom DC Direct Current
DCC Document classification code DCC Document Classification Code
DKW Dampfkraftwerk SPS Steam Power Station
DRIVE-CLiQ Drive Component Link DRIVE-CLiQ Drive component link
DT Dampfturbine ST Steam Turbine
E
EB Eigenbedarf AS Auxiliaries Service
ECR Erregerstromregelung ECR Excitation current regulation
EGB Elektrostatisch gefährdete Bauelemente ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
EMV Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EXC Field EXC Excitation
F
FAT Werksabnahmeprüfung FAT Factory Acceptance Test
G
G Generator G Generator
GT Gasturbine GT Gas Turbine

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 290
 Additional documents
C.1 List of abbreviations

German English
GTKW Gasturbinenkraftwerk GTPS Gas Turbine Power Station
H
HAND HAND-Betrieb MAN Manual mode
HW Hardware HW Hardware
I
IBS Inbetriebsetzung COM Commissioning
K
KA Kompaktanlage (Statisches Erregersys- CU Compact Unit (static excitation equip-
tem und Anfahrumrichter) ment with starting frequency converter)
KKS Kraftwerkkennzeichnungssystem PPIS Power Plant Identification System
KSV Kurzschließvorrichtung SC Short-circuiter
KVP Komponentenverbindungsplan CCD Component Connection Diagram
L
LATS Leittechnik am Turbosatz ICTS Instrumentation and control on the tur-
bine set
LED Leuchtdiode LED Light Emitting Diode
LS Leistungsschalter LS Circuit breaker
LT Leistungsteil PS Power section
LWL Lichtwellenleiter FO cable Fiber-optic cable
M
MLFB Maschinenlesbare Fabrikatebezeichnung MLFB Machine-readable product designation
(Artikel-Nummer) (article number)
MMC Multi media card MMC Multi Media Card
MODBUS RTU Busprotokoll für Leittechnikankopplung MODBUS RTU Bus protocol for instrumentation and
control coupling
MODBUS TCP Busprotokoll für Leittechnikankopplung MODBUS TCP Bus protocol for instrumentation and
control coupling
MS Mittelspannung MV Medium voltage
MSR Maschinenseitiger Stromrichter MSPC Motor-Side Power Converter
N
NN Normal-Null NZ Normal zero
NS Niederspannung LV Low Voltage
NSR Netzseitiger Stromrichter LSPC Line-Side Power Converter
O
OLM Optical link module OLM Optical Link Module
OLTC Trafostufenschalter OLTC On Load Tap Changer
OS Optionenschrank OC Options cabinet
P
PCC Leittechnikwarte PCC Power Control Center
PDG Pendeldämpfungsgerät PSS Power System Stabilizer
PELV Schutzkleinspannung PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
PSA Power Stack Adapter PSA Power Stack Adapter

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 291
Additional documents
C.1 List of abbreviations

German English
PROFIBUS Spezifikation der PROFIBUS Nutzeror- PROFIBUS Specification of the Process Field Bus
ganisation (Process Field Bus) (PROFIBUS) user organization
PROFINET Process Field Network PROFINET Process Field Network
R
RIB Reparierbarkeit im Betrieb MdO Maintenance during operation
RM Rückmeldung FS Feedback Signal
S
S7 SIMATIC Step 7 S7 SIMATIC Step 7
SES Statisches Erregersystem SES Static excitation system
SICROWBAR Überspannungsschutz SICROWBAR Overvoltage protection
SLD Single line diagram SLD Single Line Diagram
SPS Speicherprogrammierbares System PLC Programmable logic controller
SR Stromrichter PC Power converter
SW Software SW Software
S/R Steuer- und Regelschrank CC Control cubicle
D
TM Terminal Module TM Terminal Module
TSE TSE-Beschaltung SN Snubber Network
Schutzbeschaltung der Thyristoren mit
RC-Gliedern
U
UDP Universal Data Protokoll UDP Universal Data Protocol
UGS Untergruppensteuerung SGC Subgroup Control
UI User-Interface UI User Interface
US Unterspannung LV Low Voltage
USB Universal Serial Bus USB Universal Serial Bus
UTC Universal Time Coordinated UTC Universal Time Coordinated
V
VSMD Visuelle SMD Kontrolle VSMD Visual SMD check
W
WIN TS Siemens Ferndiagnosesystem WIN TS Siemens remote diagnostic system
WKW Wasserkraftwerk HPP Hydro Power Plant
Z
ZK Zwischenkreis ZK DC link

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

292 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Additional documents
C.2 Deployed components

C.2 Deployed components

Note
When links are clicked, the following must be observed:
• Links to Internet pages from Siemens:
The Siemens Internet pages contain the associated current version of the component
description with the description of the functionality current at this time.
Depending on the time of the system delivery, the functionality of the deployed
components can differ from this description.
• Links to the Internet pages of the manufacturers of bought-in parts:
Siemens does not have any influence on the topicality and correctness of the information
offered here.
The links and further links offered there offer further information and opinions that also lie
outside the influence area of Siemens.
In the event of queries and problems, please contact your Siemens sales partner.

Note
Supplied documentation
The guides for the important components of the ordered system are supplied as part of the
project-specific documentation.
These guides conform to the version of the deployed components.

Table C- 1 Descriptions of the deployed components

Component, manufacturer, order number Link

Digital voltage monitoring relay -
Siemens, 3UG4632-1AW30 (https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/de/Catalog/Product/3UG4632-
1AW30)
SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 317-2 PN/DP -
Siemens, 6ES7317-2EK14-0AB0 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/36816526)
Communications Processor CP342-5 - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/4088948)
Siemens, 6GK7342-5DA02-0XE0 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/4088948)
Communications Processor CP343-1 Lean - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23523142)
(option) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23523142)
Siemens, 6GK7343-1CX10-0XE0
SCALANCE X208 - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24626574)
Siemens, 6GK5208-0BA10-2AA3 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24626574)
SCALANCE X204-2 (option) - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24631865)
Siemens, 6GK5204-2BB10-2AA3 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24631865)
IM151 PN Interface Module for ET200S on - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29780409)
PROFINET (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29780409)
Siemens, 6ES7151-3AA23-0AB0

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 293
Additional documents
C.2 Deployed components

Component, manufacturer, order number Link

PM-E 24 VDC Power Module for Electronic - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/25547978)
Modules; with diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/25547978)
Siemens, 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
Electronic Module 8DI 24 VDC, standard - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23849842)
Siemens, 6ES7131-4BF00-0AA0 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23849842)
Electronic Module 8DO 24 VDC / 0.5 A, - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23848195)
standard (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23848195)
Siemens, 6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0
SIMATIC HMI IPC 577C - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37443525)
Siemens (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37443525)
SINAMICS Control Unit CU320-2 PN Please contact your Siemens sales representative.
Siemens
SINAMICS DCM Control Module - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/52234840/133300)
Siemens, 6RA8000-0MV62-0AA0-Z (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/52234840/133300)
Z=G00+G20+S01+L10
VariTrans B 13000 normalized signal isolator - (http://www.knick.de)
Knick, B13000F1 OPT.336 (http://www.knick.de)
PT-100 evaluation unit TR600 (option) - (http://www.ziehl.de/ziehl/englisch/indexe.html)
Ziehl, TR600 (http://www.ziehl.de/index.html)
SENTRON 3WL air circuit breakers - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20367654/133200)
Siemens, 3WL (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20367654/133200)
SICROWBAR DC overvoltage protection - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21689627/133300)
Siemens, 7VV3003 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21689627/133300)
SICROWBAR AC overvoltage protection - (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21689627/133300)
(option) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21689627/133300)
Siemens, 7VV3002
Digital speed monitoring relay (option) -
Siemens, 3UG4651-2AW30 (https://eb.automation.siemens.com/mall/en/DE/Catalog/Product/3UG4651-
2AW30)
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/de/Catalog/Product/3UG4651-
2AW30)
Asymmetric digital monitoring relay -
Siemens, 3UG4614-1BR20 (https://eb.automation.siemens.com/mall/en/DE/Catalog/Product/3UG4614-
1BR20)
(https://eb.automation.siemens.com/mall/en/de/Catalog/Product/3UG4614-
1BR20)
For compact unit: See the supplied project-specific documentation or
SINAMICS GL150 AC medium-voltage con- - (www.siemens.com/sinamics-gl150)(www.siemens.com/sinamics-gl150)
verter
Siemens

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

294 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Additional documents
C.3 Article number key

See also
3UG4632-1AW30 voltage monitoring relay
(https://eb.automation.siemens.com/mall/en/DE/Catalog/Product/3UG4632-1AW30)
SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 317-2 PN/DP
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/36816526)

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 295
Additional documents
C.3 Article number key

C.3 Article number key

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

296 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Additional documents
C.4 Signals for representation and recording

C.4 Signals for representation and recording

Overview of the signals available for representation on the display and operator panel and
for recording (e.g. trace):

Table C- 2 Available signals

Signalname deutsch Signal name English PLC1 PLC1 Supple Analog Trend Sys- Black- Black-
pa- pa- ple- screen record- tem box fix box
rame- rame- mentar ing trace selec-
ter ter y value tion
num- num- in
ber ber screen
index s
Lokal Local 33500 0 X
Redundanz vorhanden Redundancy 33500 1 X X
Kanalumschaltung Channel switch enabled 33500 2 X
erlaubt
Kanalumschaltung Inhibit channel switch 33500 3 X
gesperrt
Einschaltbereit Ready to switch on 33500 5 X X
Erregung Ein verfügbar Excitation on enabled 33500 6 X
Erregung Aus verfügbar Excitation off enabled 33500 7 X
Erregung Ein läuft Excitation on active 33500 8 X
Erregung Aus läuft Excitation off active 33500 9 X
Erregung ist Ein EXC is ON 33500 10 X X X
Hand verfügbar ECR enabled 33500 11 X
Auto verfügbar AVR enabled 33500 12 X
Auto ist Ein AVR is ON 33500 13 X X X
Begrenzung aktiv Limiter active 33500 14 X X
n > 90 % n > 90 % 33501 0 X X
Generator am Netz Connected to grid 33501 1 X X
Schutz-AUS extern Protection off extern 33501 2 X X
Gruppenmeldung Group message 33501 3 X
AUR ist Ein SFC is on 33501 4 X X
AUR Querschleppen SFC CrossStart 33501 5 X
RiB Stromrichter sper- MdO lock powercon- 33501 12 X
ren verter
RiB Stromrichter MdO unlock powercon- 33501 13 X
freigeben verter
RiB Trenner öffnen MdO open isolator 33501 14 X
RiB Trenner schließen MdO close isolator 33501 15 X
Q-Regelung Ein erlaubt Q control on enabled 33502 0 X
Q-Regelung Aus erlaubt Q control off enabled 33502 1 X
Q-Regelung ist Ein Q control is on 33502 2 X

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 297
Additional documents
C.4 Signals for representation and recording

Signalname deutsch Signal name English PLC1 PLC1 Supple Analog Trend Sys- Black- Black-
pa- pa- ple- screen record- tem box fix box
rame- rame- mentar ing trace selec-
ter ter y value tion
num- num- in
ber ber screen
index s
cos phi-Regelung Ein Power factor control on 33502 3 X
erlaubt enabled
cos phi-Regelung Aus Power factor control off 33502 4 X
erlaubt enabled
cos phi-Regelung ist Power factor control is 33502 5 X
Ein on
PDG Ein erlaubt PSS on enabled 33502 6 X
PDG Aus erlaubt PSS off enabled 33502 7 X
PDG ist Ein PSS is on 33502 8 X
Testbetrieb Ein erlaubt Test mode on enabled 33502 9 X
Testbetrieb Aus erlaubt Test mode off enabled 33502 10 X
Testbetrieb ist Ein Test mode is on 33502 11 X
Entriegelter Betrieb Ein Unlocked mode on 33502 12 X
erlaubt enabled
Entriegelter Betrieb Aus Unlocked mode off 33502 13 X
erlaubt enabled
Entriegelter Betrieb ist Unlocked mode is on 33502 14 X
Ein
Kanalumschaltsperre Inhibit channel switch 33502 15 X
erlaubt enabled
RiB Stromrichter an- Mdo powerconverter 33503 X
gewählt selected
RiB Stromrichter 1 MdO powerconverter 1 33503 0 X
angewählt selected
RiB Stromrichter 2 MdO powerconverter 2 33503 1 X
angewählt selected
RiB Stromrichter 3 MdO powerconverter 3 33503 2 X
angewählt selected
RiB Stromrichter 4 MdO powerconverter 4 33503 3 X
angewählt selected
RiB Stromrichter 5 MdO powerconverter 5 33503 4 X
angewählt selected
Kanal ist aktiv Channel is active 31500 0 X X
BAR aktiv RPJC active 31500 14 X X
Ug Sollwertsteller Ug setpoint adjuster 31503 X X X X
If Sollwertsteller If setpoint adjuster 31504 X X X X X
Q Sollwertsteller Q setpoint adjuster 31505 X X X X X
cos phi Sollwertsteller cos phi setpoint adjust- 31506 X X X X X
er
Ug Istwert Ug Actual value 31507 X X X X X

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

298 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Additional documents
C.4 Signals for representation and recording

Signalname deutsch Signal name English PLC1 PLC1 Supple Analog Trend Sys- Black- Black-
pa- pa- ple- screen record- tem box fix box
rame- rame- mentar ing trace selec-
ter ter y value tion
num- num- in
ber ber screen
index s
If Istwert If Actual value 31508 X X X X X
Uf Erregerspannung Uf Excitation voltage 31509 X X X
Q Istwert Q Actual value 31510 X X X X X
P Leistung P Power 31511 X X X X
f Frequenz f Frequency 31512 X X X X X
Ig Generatorstrom Ig Generator current 31513 X X X X X
Steuerwinkel Firing angle 31515 X X X X X
Rotor Temperatur Rotor temperature 31516 X X X X X
BAR System Istwert RPJC System value 31517 X X X
Anschlussspannung Supply voltage 31518 X X
cos phi Istwert cos phi actual value 31520 X X X X X
Leistungsteilfehler Powerconverter error 31521 X X
Trace Status CUD Trace status CUD 31522 X
Ug Sollwert max Ug setpoint max 31532 X X
Ug Sollwert min Ug setpoint min 31533 X X
If Sollwert max If setpoint max 31534 X X
If Sollwert min If setpoint min 31535 X X
Q Sollwert max Q setpoint max 31538 X X
Q Sollwert min Q setpoint min 31539 X X
LT 1 Strom fließt PS 1 current flowing 31543 0 X
LT 2 Strom fließt PS 2 current flowing 31543 1 X
LT 3 Strom fließt PS 3 current flowing 31543 2 X
LT 4 Strom fließt PS 4 current flowing 31543 3 X
LT 5 Strom fließt PS 5 current flowing 31543 4 X
Frei verschaltbarer Wert Free value 1 31550 X X
1
Frei verschaltbarer Wert Free value 2 31551 X X
2
Frei verschaltbarer Wert Free value 3 31552 X X
3
Frei verschaltbarer Wert Free value 4 31553 X X
4
Frei verschaltbarer Wert Free value 5 31554 X X
5
Frei verschaltbarer Wert Free value 6 31555 X X
6
Frei verschaltbarer Wert Free value 7 31556 X X
7

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 299
Additional documents
C.4 Signals for representation and recording

Signalname deutsch Signal name English PLC1 PLC1 Supple Analog Trend Sys- Black- Black-
pa- pa- ple- screen record- tem box fix box
rame- rame- mentar ing trace selec-
ter ter y value tion
num- num- in
ber ber screen
index s
Frei verschaltbarer Wert Free value 8 31557 X X
8
BAR ist ein RPJC on 31001 4 X X X
Leitung hochfahren Line ramp up 31002 4 X X
Kaltgas Temperatur Cold gas temperature 31006 X X X X X
BAR System Sollwert RPJC System setpoint 31009 X X X
Wasserkraft Option Hydro electric option 31012 X X
AUR Einschaltbereit SFC Ready to switch on 36504 0 X
AUR Betriebsbereit SFC Ready 36504 1 X
AUR Störung SFC Error 36504 3 X X
AUR Aus3 SFC Off3 36504 5 X
AUR Einschaltsperre Operation not allowed 36504 6 X
aktiv
AUR Warnung aktiv SFC Warning 36504 7 X
AUR ist Aus SFC is off 36504 8 X
AUR Netzseitiger Leis- SFC line side circuit 36504 11 X
tungschalter ist Ein breaker is on
AUR Netzseitiger Leis- SFC line side circuit 36504 12 X
tungschalter ist Aus breaker is off
AUR Netzseitiger Leis- SFC line side circuit 36504 13 X
tungschalter nicht bereit breaker is not ready
AUR Betrieb SFC Operation 36504 13 X X
AUR Testbetrieb SFC Test mode 36504 15 X
AUR Lüfter bereit SFC fans ready 36505 0 X
Soll Drehzahl Speed setpoint starting 36512 X
Anfahrumrichter converter
Drehzahl Anfahrum- Speed value starting 36513 X X
richter converter
AUR Zwischenkreis- Intermediate link volt- 36514 X
spannung age
Generatorspannung Generator voltage start- 36515 X
Anfahrumrichter ing converter
AUR Zwischkreisstrom Intermediate link current 36516 X
Generatorleistung Generator power start- 36517 X
Anfahrumrichter ing converter
Drehmoment Anfahrum- Torque starting con- 36518 X
richter verter
AUR Parameter geän- SFC Parameter 32503 8 X
dert DO1 changed DO1

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

300 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Additional documents
C.4 Signals for representation and recording

Signalname deutsch Signal name English PLC1 PLC1 Supple Analog Trend Sys- Black- Black-
pa- pa- ple- screen record- tem box fix box
rame- rame- mentar ing trace selec-
ter ter y value tion
num- num- in
ber ber screen
index s
AUR Parameter geän- SFC Parameter 32503 9 X
dert DO2 changed DO2
Erregerstromsollwert Excitation current set- 32517 X
Umrichterbetrieb point starting converter
Trace Status AUR Trace status SFC 32522 X
AUR Externer Trenner SFC external isolator off 34018 2 X
ist Aus
AUR Externer Trenner SFC external isolator on 34018 3 X
ist Ein
AUR Externer Trenner SFC external isolator 34018 4 X
Sicherungszustand fuse
AUR Externer Trenner SFC external isolator 34018 5 X
Fehler error
Schnellstart Gas Fast start gas 34021 12 X
Start Öl Start oil 34021 13 X
Schnelles Abkühlen Fast cooling 34021 14 X
Belüften Schwarz Black purging 34021 15 X
Drehbetrieb Turning 34022 6 X
Phasenschieberstart Condenser 34022 7 X
Bremsen Braking 34022 8 X
Schwarzstart Black start 34022 9 X
Belüften Purging 34022 11 X
Waschen Washing 34022 12 X
Normalstart Normal start 34022 13 X
BAR Istwert Generator RPJC Value generator 36506 X X X
1 1
BAR Istwert Generator RPJC Value generator 36507 X X X
2 2
BAR Istwert Generator RPJC Value generator 36508 X X X
3 3
BAR Istwert Generator RPJC Value generator 36509 X X X
4 4
BAR Istwert Generator RPJC Value generator 36510 X X X
5 5
BAR Istwert Generator RPJC Value generator 36511 X X X
6 6
Befehl Erregung Ein Control excitation on 33000 0 X
Befehl Erregung Aus Control excitation off 33000 1 X
Befehl Auto Ein Control AVR on 33000 2 X
Befehl Hand Ein Control ECR on 33000 3 X

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 301
Additional documents
C.4 Signals for representation and recording

Signalname deutsch Signal name English PLC1 PLC1 Supple Analog Trend Sys- Black- Black-
pa- pa- ple- screen record- tem box fix box
rame- rame- mentar ing trace selec-
ter ter y value tion
num- num- in
ber ber screen
index s
Befehl Q-Regelung Ein Control Q on 33000 4 X
Befehl Q-Regelung Aus Control Q off 33000 5 X
Befehl cos phi- Power factor control on 33000 6 X
Regelung Ein
Befehl cos phi- Power factor control off 33000 7 X
Regelung Aus
Befehl Höher Control up 33000 12 X
Befehl Tiefer Control down 33000 13 X
Befehl Sollwert aktu- Control setpoint update 33000 14 X
alisieren
Befehl Datum/Uhrzeit Control date/time up- 33000 15 X
aktualisieren date
Befehl Quittieren Control Quit 33001 0 X
Befehl Kanalumschal- Control channel switch 33001 1 X
tung
Befehl Kanalum- Control inhibit channel 33001 2 X
schaltsperre Ein switch on
Befehl Kanalum- Control inhibit channel 33001 3 X
schaltsperre Aus switch off
Befehl Stromrichter- Control open 33001 6 X
trenner öffnen powerconverter discon-
nector
Befehl Stromrichter- Control close 33001 7 X
trenner schließen powerconverter discon-
nector
Befehl Stromrichter Control release 33001 10 X
freigeben powerconverter
Befehl Stromrichter Control lock powercon- 33001 11 X
sperren verter
Befehl Testbetrieb Ein Control test mode on 33001 12 X
Befehl Testbetrieb Aus Control test mode off 33001 13 X
Befehl Entriegelter Control unlocked mode 33001 14 X
Betrieb Ein on
Befehl Entriegelter Control unlocked mode 33001 15 X
Betrieb Aus off
RiB Stromrichter 1 MdO select powercon- 33002 0 X
anwählen verter 1
RiB Stromrichter 2 MdO select powercon- 33002 1 X
anwählen verter 2
RiB Stromrichter 3 MdO select powercon- 33002 2 X
anwählen verter 3

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

302 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Additional documents
C.4 Signals for representation and recording

Signalname deutsch Signal name English PLC1 PLC1 Supple Analog Trend Sys- Black- Black-
pa- pa- ple- screen record- tem box fix box
rame- rame- mentar ing trace selec-
ter ter y value tion
num- num- in
ber ber screen
index s
RiB Stromrichter 4 MdO select powercon- 33002 3 X
anwählen verter 4
RiB Stromrichter 5 MdO select powercon- 33002 4 X
anwählen verter 5
Befehl Stromrichter- Control close 33002 15 X
trenner verzögert powerconverter discon-
schließen nector delayed
If Sollwert If setpoint 33510 X X X X X
Ug Sollwert Ug setpoint 33511 X X X X X
Q Sollwert Q setpoint 33512 X X X X X
cos phi Sollwert cos phi setpoint 33513 X X X X X

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 303
Additional documents
C.5 Profinet configuration

C.5 Profinet configuration

Figure C-1 PN configuration THYRIPOL 6RV80

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

304 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Additional documents
C.5 Profinet configuration

Table C- 3 IP addresses for transverse starting and/or BAR

Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 Unit 6

CP 343-1 Lean CH1: 11 21 31 41 51 61
100.100.100.
CP 343-1 Lean CH2: 12 22 32 42 52 62
100.100.100.
Scalance X204-2 13 23 33 43 53 63
CH1: 100.100.100.
Scalance X204-2 14 24 34 44 54 64
CH2: 100.100.100.

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 305
Additional documents
C.5 Profinet configuration

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

306 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
Index

Connecting, 85
Connecting the cable, 91
A Torque, 80
Corrective maintenance
Abbreviations, 290
Replacing a fan, 201, 204
Access authorization, 116
CUD/BCU software
Access levels, 116
Installation, 111
Commissioning mode, 116
Current symmetry control, 179
User mode, 116
Actual value acquisition, 154
Additional information, 241
D
Alarm messages, 186
Architecture, 34 Dimension drawings, 271
Article number key, 296, 304 Display and operator panel, 118
Automatic mode, 153 Installation, 107
Actual value acquisition, 154 Overview, 37
Controller structure, 153 Screens, 123
Overexcitation limitation, 156 Disposal, 239
Reactive current droop and reactive current Documentation
compensation, 158 Structure, 5
Setpoint control, 155
Shock excitation limitation, 157
Stator current limitation, 157 E
Underexcitation limitation, 156
Electrical connection
V/f limitation, 158
Electromagnetic compatibility, 87
EMC, 87
Electromagnetic fields, 21
B
Emergency turning, 165
Braking operation, 165 Environmental protection, 239
ESD guidelines, 25

C
F
Cabling, 91
Transport units, 92 Fan, 201
Change language, 137 Replacing, 201, 204
Circuit diagrams, 283 Storage, 201
Commissioning Fast cooling (optionally available), 165
Hardware, 99 Fast gas start, 164
Software, 105 Fault messages, 186
Commissioning mode, 116 Fault recorder, 143
Communication Field current controller operation (ECR), 159
PROFIBUS, 181 Free function blocks, 180
Components
Description, 293
Links, 293 H
Overview, 29
Hardware
Commissioning, 99

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 307
Index

Hold the firing speed, 164 O

Hydroelectric power plants, 166
On-site service, 241
Open-loop and closed-loop control functions
Redundancy concept, 169
I
Operating hours counter, 141
Initial excitation, 173 Operating modes
Inspection and maintenance schedule, 193 Automatic mode, 153
Installation Braking operation, 165
CUD/BCU, 111 Emergency turning, 165
Display and operator panel, 107 Excitation systems, 153
S7 software, 110 Fast gas start, 164
Software, 107 Field current controller operation (ECR), 159
Instrumentation and control coupling Hold the firing speed, 164
Hardwired, 182 Manual mode, 159
Phase shifter start, 165
Self-contained start, 166
K Starting with two starting profiles, 164
Unlocked mode, 168
Keyswitch, 115
Washing operation, 164
LOCAL, 116
Operating modes of the compact system, 164
REMOTE, 116
Operating modes of the excitation systems, 153
Operation
Display and operator panel, 118
L
Software, 113
List Manuals, 186 Option L45, 166
LOCAL, 116 Option L90, 167
Option S08, 167
Option S15, 161
M Option S18, 167
Option S19, 167
Maintenance, 187, 187
Options, 47
Cleaning, 196
Options S30 and S31, 160
Fan, 196
Order number key, 296, 304
Grounding the plant, 191
Overexcitation limitation, 156
Inspection and maintenance schedule, 193
Overview, 29
Inspection of the cooling air system, 195
Screw connections, 196
Manual mode, 159
P
Controller structure, 159
Memory cards, 114 Phase shifter start, 165
Messages, 186 Power factor control, 160
Alarm messages, 186 Power system stabilizer, 159
Fault messages, 186 PROFIBUS, 181
System messages, 186 Protection of personnel, 17, 19
MLFB key, 296, 304
Modbus TCP, 181
Mounting, 79 R
Reactive current compensation, 158
Reactive current droop, 158
N
Reactive power compensation control, 161
Normal start, 164 Reactive power control, 160
Recycling, 239

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

308 Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A
 Index

REMOTE, 116 Starting converter

Replacement of the power converter, 207, 217 Derating, 256
Replacing fuses, 228 Load cycle, 252
Starting frequency converter, 37, 163
Method of operation, 163
S Technical specifications, 254
Starting with two starting profiles, 164
S7 software
Static excitation equipment
Installation, 110
Load cycle, 257
Safety, 17
Load cycles, 268
Note, 15
Technical specifications, 258
Protection of personnel, 17
Stator current limitation, 157
System protection, 22
Storage media, 114
Scope of delivery, 40
Switching off the excitation system, 172
Screen forms, (See screens)
Switching on the excitation system, 172
Screens, 123
System messages, 186
Admin, 138
System protection, 22
Analog values, 126
Fault recorder, 143
Languages, 137
T
Logbook, 146
Messages, 135 Technical specifications, 243
Operating hours counter, 141 Test excitation, 168
Parameter, 146 Tilt indicators, 72
P-Q, 131 Transportation, 69
Reactive power / CosPhi controller, 128 Shock indicators, 72
Service, 137 Tilt indicators, 72
Software versions, 140 Transportation altitude, 74
Start, 123 Transverse start, 177
Startup Frequency Converter, 136
System trace, 144
Trends, 132 U
Values, 124
Underexcitation limitation, 156
Screw connections
Unlocked mode, 168
Check, 196
User documentation, 5
Tightening torques, 80
User mode, 116
SEE derating, 270
Self-contained start, 166
Service Center, 241
V
Setpoint control, 155
SFC derating, 256 V/f limitation, 158
Shock excitation limitation, 157 Voltage regulator mode, 153
Shock indicators, 72
Siemens Service Center, 241
Signals, 297 W
Software, 113
Washing operation, 164
Commissioning, 105
Operation, 113
Software installation, 107
Spare parts, 241
Standards, 46

Static excitation systems with/without starting frequency converter

Operating Instructions, 03/2017, A5E33461870A 309